WO2024001655A1 - 一种通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024001655A1
WO2024001655A1 PCT/CN2023/097383 CN2023097383W WO2024001655A1 WO 2024001655 A1 WO2024001655 A1 WO 2024001655A1 CN 2023097383 W CN2023097383 W CN 2023097383W WO 2024001655 A1 WO2024001655 A1 WO 2024001655A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
matrix
network device
elements
terminal devices
uplink
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2023/097383
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
蔡世杰
高翔
刘鹍鹏
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP23829840.0A priority Critical patent/EP4535681A4/en
Publication of WO2024001655A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024001655A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00—Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
    • H04L25/0224—Channel estimation using sounding signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00—Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/0202—Channel estimation
    • H04L25/0224—Channel estimation using sounding signals
    • H04L25/0228—Channel estimation using sounding signals with direct estimation from sounding signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the base station can configure resources for sending sounding reference signals (SRS) to the terminal equipment, and the terminal equipment sends the SRS to the base station on the configured resources.
  • the base station can perform channel estimation based on the received SRS to determine the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the base station When a base station serves a large number of terminal devices, the base station needs to perform channel estimation on each of the multiple terminal devices, and then determine the downlink precoding matrix of each of the multiple terminal devices. It can be seen that the process for the base station to determine the downlink precoding matrices of multiple terminal devices is relatively cumbersome.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device for simplifying the process of determining precoding matrices of multiple terminal devices.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be executed by a network device, or can be executed by a chip system, and the chip system can implement the functions of the network device.
  • network device execution is taken as an example below.
  • the method includes: receiving multiple uplink signals from multiple terminal devices on a first resource, each of the uplink signals coming from one of the multiple terminal devices; and determining downlink precoding according to the multiple uplink signals. Matrix, the downlink precoding matrix is used to send data to multiple terminal devices.
  • multiple terminal devices can respectively send uplink signals on the first resource, and the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple terminal devices based on the uplink signals from multiple terminal devices.
  • Each of the terminal devices independently determines the precoding matrix, which simplifies the process of determining the downlink precoding matrices of multiple terminal devices and helps reduce the computational overhead of the network device.
  • multiple terminal devices share a downlink precoding matrix, which is beneficial to saving downlink precoding overhead.
  • since the plurality of terminal devices all send the first uplink signal on the first resource it is beneficial to reduce the resource overhead required for the plurality of terminal devices to send the uplink signal.
  • the plurality of uplink signals are reference signals; or the plurality of uplink signals are analog signals, wherein each terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices corresponds to a first matrix , each first matrix includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element, each non-zero element is a merging coefficient, and the merging coefficient is a merging coefficient of a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector, each Each of the uplink signals indicates M elements, the M elements are M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the terminal device that sends the uplink signal, and the M elements are in the M elements of the first matrix. In terms of positions, the M positions are all different, and M is a positive integer.
  • This embodiment provides two specific implementations of uplink signals.
  • One uplink signal is a reference signal.
  • the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrix based on the reference signals of multiple terminal devices. Since multiple end The terminal devices all send uplink signals on the first resource, which reduces the resource overhead of multiple terminal devices sending reference signals.
  • Another uplink signal is an analog signal, and the analog signal indicates M elements in the first matrix of the terminal equipment that sends the analog signal. The terminal equipment does not use digital signals to feed back the first matrix to the network equipment, which is beneficial to avoid the need for terminal equipment to Quantization loss caused by quantizing the first matrix.
  • determining a downlink precoding matrix according to the second uplink signal includes: determining a first channel matrix according to the multiple uplink signals; and performing singular value decomposition on the first channel matrix. Or perform eigenvalue decomposition to obtain the downlink precoding matrix, or perform singular value decomposition or eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrix of the first channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device can directly combine multiple uplink signals to determine a channel matrix (such as a first channel matrix) corresponding to multiple terminal devices.
  • the first channel matrix is equivalent to the sum of channel matrices of multiple terminal devices, Then, the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix according to the first channel matrix.
  • the network device does not need to separately determine the channel matrix and downlink precoding matrix for multiple terminal devices, which simplifies the process of determining the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device since the network device combines the uplink signals of multiple terminal devices to determine the downlink precoding matrix, the determined downlink precoding matrix can be better applied to multiple terminal devices.
  • the M elements indicated by any two uplink signals among the plurality of uplink signals are at the same M positions in the first matrix.
  • the M elements reported by multiple terminal devices are the same in the M positions in the first matrix of each of the multiple terminal devices. Multiple terminal devices can only report M elements without having to report them separately. M positions are helpful to reduce the amount of data reported by the terminal device. Moreover, since multiple terminal devices report M elements at the same position, the process of the network device determining the downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple terminal devices based on the M elements respectively corresponding to the multiple terminal devices is simplified.
  • determining a downlink precoding matrix according to the plurality of uplink signals includes: determining M summation results according to the plurality of uplink signals, each of the summation results being a plurality of The sum of elements, the plurality of elements correspond to the plurality of uplink signals one-to-one, each element of the plurality of elements is one of the M elements indicated by the corresponding uplink signal, and the plurality of elements Any two elements among the elements have the same position in the corresponding first matrix; the downlink precoding matrix is determined based on the M summation results and the M positions.
  • the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrix based on M summation results, thereby providing a way for the network device to determine the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device there is no need for the network device to separately determine the channel matrices and downlink precoding matrices of multiple terminal devices, which simplifies the process of the network device determining the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information from a first terminal device, the first indication information being used to indicate the M locations, and the first terminal device is the One of the multiple terminal devices.
  • one terminal device (such as the first terminal device) among multiple terminal devices can determine the M locations and indicate the M locations to the network device, without the need for the network device to determine the M locations by itself. Can reduce the processing load of network equipment.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the plurality of terminal devices, where the first indication information is used to indicate the M locations.
  • the network device can determine M locations by itself and indicate the M locations to multiple terminal devices, so that the multiple terminal devices send M elements at the M locations to the network device.
  • each terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices corresponds to a second matrix
  • Each of the second matrices includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element, and each of the non-zero elements is a merging coefficient
  • the merging coefficient is a merging coefficient of a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector, where, The M positions are determined based on the positions of non-zero elements in a plurality of second matrices corresponding to the plurality of terminal devices.
  • the network device may determine the second matrices of multiple terminal devices according to the uplink reference signals respectively from multiple terminal devices, because for the same terminal device, the first matrix and the third matrix of the terminal device The positions of the non-zero elements in the two matrices are the same, so in this embodiment, the network device can determine M positions based on the positions of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of multiple terminal devices, thereby providing a network device How to determine M locations. Moreover, in this embodiment, the M locations are determined by the network device instead of the terminal device, thereby reducing the processing load of the terminal device.
  • the M positions are the union of positions of non-zero elements in multiple second matrices corresponding to the multiple terminal devices, or the M positions are the The intersection of the positions of non-zero elements in multiple second matrices corresponding to multiple terminal devices.
  • the network device can use the intersection or union of the positions of the non-zero elements in the multiple second matrices as M positions, so that the M positions can retain the non-zero elements in the multiple second matrices as much as possible.
  • position that is, multiple terminal devices can report non-zero elements in the first matrices of multiple terminal devices as much as possible, so that the network device can obtain as much as possible the non-zero elements in the first matrices corresponding to multiple terminal devices. effective information (non-zero elements), thus helping to determine the downlink precoding matrix more accurately.
  • the method further includes: determining at least one power control parameter according to the channel quality of some or all of the plurality of terminal devices, and the at least one power control parameter corresponds to the At least one terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices, each of the at least one power control parameter is a power control parameter configured for one of the at least one terminal device, wherein the power The control parameter is used to determine the power of transmitting the uplink signal.
  • the network device may determine the power control parameter of each terminal device in at least one terminal device with reference to the channel quality of some or all terminal devices among the plurality of terminal devices, so that each terminal device in the plurality of terminal devices
  • the power of the device sending uplink signals is more reasonable.
  • the power of terminal devices sending uplink signals will affect the power of network devices receiving uplink signals. Therefore, adjusting the power of multiple terminal devices sending uplink signals will help improve the downlink precoding matrix subsequently determined by network devices and be more suitable for multiple terminals. equipment.
  • one of the at least one power control parameter includes an expected power and/or a power difference
  • the expected power refers to the desired power corresponding to the one power control parameter that the network device expects.
  • the power of the uplink signal sent by the terminal device, or the power of the uplink signal sent by the terminal device corresponding to the one power control parameter that the network device expects to receive, and the power difference refers to the power of the one power control parameter.
  • the corresponding terminal device sends the power difference of the uplink signal twice.
  • the method further includes: sending first information to the at least one terminal device respectively, where the first information is used to indicate the power corresponding to the terminal device that receives the first information. Control parameters.
  • the method further includes: sending first data to the plurality of terminal devices respectively according to the downlink precoding matrix, wherein sending the first data to the plurality of terminal devices The data uses the same modulation and coding strategies.
  • multiple terminal devices share a downlink precoding matrix, reducing the downlink precoding matrix development time. pin.
  • multiple terminal devices share a modulation and coding strategy, which also reduces the overhead of modulation and coding strategies.
  • the method further includes: receiving response information from the first terminal device, where the response information is used to indicate whether the second terminal device successfully receives the first data, or, using In order to indicate whether the plurality of terminal devices all successfully receive the first data, the second terminal device is one of the plurality of terminal devices.
  • one terminal device (such as the first terminal device) can feed back the response information to the first data to the network device, without the need for multiple terminal devices to send response information to the network device respectively, which is beneficial to reducing the number of connections between the terminal device and the network device. The number of interactions between network devices.
  • the channel quality of the second terminal device is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the first terminal device may feed back response information of the second terminal device whose channel quality is relatively small to the network device, so as to reduce the number of bits occupied by the response information fed back by the first terminal device.
  • the method further includes: sending second instruction information to the first terminal device, the second instruction information being used to instruct the first terminal device to send the requested information to the network device. Describe the response information.
  • the network device can flexibly designate a terminal device (such as a first terminal device) to feedback response information.
  • the method further includes: determining that the channel correlation between any two terminal devices among the plurality of terminal devices is greater than or equal to a second threshold.
  • the network device can select multiple terminal devices with greater channel correlation, and determine a downlink precoding matrix shared by these multiple terminal devices, so that the downlink precoding matrix can be applied to these multiple terminals. equipment.
  • the method further includes: determining that the data to be transmitted to the plurality of terminal devices corresponds to the same application.
  • the network device can select the multiple terminal devices to correspond to the same application, and determine a downlink precoding matrix shared by the multiple terminal devices, so that the network device can send the same data to the multiple terminal devices.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be executed by a network device or a chip system.
  • the chip system can implement the functions of the network device.
  • the method includes: receiving a downlink precoding indication from a first terminal device, the downlink precoding indication being used to indicate a downlink precoding matrix; sending first data to a plurality of terminal devices according to the downlink precoding matrix, the plurality of A terminal device includes the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines the downlink precoding instruction by itself, and the network device can obtain the downlink precoding matrix according to the downlink precoding instruction, which reduces and simplifies the processing load of the network device. Moreover, multiple terminal devices share a downlink precoding matrix, which is beneficial to reducing the overhead of the precoding matrix.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device or a chip system.
  • the chip system can implement the functions of the terminal device.
  • the method includes: sending a first uplink signal sequence to a network device, the first uplink signal sequence occupying multiple resource elements in the frequency domain; sending a second uplink signal sequence to the network device, the second uplink signal
  • the sequence occupies multiple resource elements in the frequency domain, the phase difference between the first uplink signal sequence and the second uplink signal sequence on the resource element with the same index value is not 2n ⁇ , n is an integer, and,
  • the phase difference between the first uplink signal sequence on the resource elements of the first index value and the second index value and the phase of the second uplink signal sequence on the resource elements of the first index value and the second index value The difference between the differences is 2m ⁇ , m is an integer.
  • the phase is variable, so that the phase between the uplink signal sequences of multiple terminal devices received by the network device is also variable, which is beneficial to the network device to improve the accuracy of determining the covariance matrix of the channel matrix shared by multiple terminal devices, that is, It is helpful for network equipment to determine a more accurate downlink precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: receiving first information from the network device, the first information being used to indicate power control parameters of the first terminal device, the power control parameters Used to determine the power with which the first terminal device sends the first uplink signal sequence and/or the second uplink signal sequence.
  • the first terminal device can determine the power to send the first uplink signal sequence and/or the second uplink signal sequence according to the power control parameters indicated by the network device, which is beneficial to the first terminal device successfully sending the first uplink signal. sequence and/or the second uplink signal sequence.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device or a chip system.
  • the chip system can implement the functions of the terminal device.
  • the method includes: determining M elements of the first matrix corresponding to the first terminal device, wherein the M elements are located at M positions in the first matrix, and the M positions are all different, and the The first matrix includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element, each of the non-zero elements is a merging coefficient, the merging coefficient is a merging coefficient of a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector, and M is a positive integer; in Send a first uplink signal to the network device on the first resource, where the first uplink signal is an analog signal, and the first uplink signal is used to indicate the M elements.
  • the first terminal device can use analog signals to report M elements in the first matrix of the first terminal device. Since the first terminal device does not have to report all elements in the first matrix, it is advantageous. The amount of reporting by the first terminal device is reduced, and analog signals are used to report the M elements instead of digital signals. Therefore, the quantization loss caused by the first terminal device quantizing the M elements is avoided.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the network device or other terminal equipment, the first indication information being used to indicate the M locations, and the other terminal devices
  • a device refers to a terminal device among multiple terminal devices except the first terminal device.
  • the method further includes: receiving the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix from each of the other terminal devices, wherein the other terminal devices are multiple terminal devices.
  • each of the plurality of terminal devices corresponds to one of the first matrices; according to the plurality of first matrices corresponding to the plurality of terminal devices The positions of the non-zero elements in , determine the M positions.
  • the first terminal device may receive non-zero elements and positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix from other terminal devices, so that based on the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the plurality of terminal devices, Determining M locations provides a way for the first terminal device to determine M locations.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device sending first indication information to the other terminal device and/or the network device, the first indication information being used to indicate the Describe M positions.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be executed by any terminal device or by a chip system.
  • the chip system can implement the functions of the terminal device.
  • the method includes: determining M summation results, wherein each summation result is the sum of a plurality of elements, the plurality of elements are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of first matrices, and each of the plurality of elements is Each element is one of the M elements in the corresponding first matrix.
  • the M elements are located at M positions in the corresponding first matrix. The M positions are all different.
  • each first matrix in the plurality of first matrices corresponds to one terminal device in a plurality of terminal devices, and each first matrix includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element, and each first matrix
  • Each of the non-zero elements is a merging coefficient
  • the merging coefficient is the merging coefficient of the spatial domain vector and the frequency domain vector
  • M is a positive integer
  • a precoding matrix indication is sent to the network device, and the precoding matrix indication is based on the Determined by M summation results, the precoding matrix indication is used to indicate a downlink precoding matrix, and the downlink precoding matrix is used to transmit data.
  • a mechanism for a network device to obtain a downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple terminal devices.
  • the first terminal device can determine the indication by itself based on M summation results.
  • the network device can obtain the downlink precoding matrix according to the downlink precoding indication, thereby simplifying the processing load of the network device.
  • multiple terminal devices can share a downlink precoding matrix, which is beneficial to reducing the overhead of the precoding matrix.
  • the method further includes: receiving second information from each of the other terminal devices, the second information being used to indicate the terminal device that sent the second information.
  • the non-zero elements of the first matrix and the positions of the non-zero elements, the other terminal devices are terminal devices other than the first terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices, wherein the M positions are based on The positions of the non-zero elements in the plurality of first matrices are determined; or, receiving third information from each terminal device in other terminal devices, the third information is used to indicate the source of the third information.
  • the other terminal devices are terminal devices other than the first terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices, wherein any two of the plurality of terminal devices
  • the M elements corresponding to the terminal devices have the same M positions in the corresponding first matrix.
  • other terminal devices can send the corresponding non-zero elements and the positions of the non-zero elements of the first matrix to the first terminal device, and then the first terminal device can determine M positions and M Ask for a result.
  • the first terminal device and other terminal devices have obtained M positions in advance, and other terminal devices can only send M elements at M positions to the first terminal device, and then the first terminal device can based on the M elements sent by other terminal devices.
  • M elements at M positions, thereby determining M summing positions can relatively reduce the amount of data sent by other terminal devices to the first terminal device.
  • the method includes: receiving first data from a network device; sending response information to the network device, where the response information is used to indicate whether the second terminal device successfully receives the first data. data, or used to indicate whether the plurality of terminal devices successfully receive the first data, and the second terminal device is one of the plurality of terminal devices.
  • the channel quality of the second terminal device is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the method further includes: receiving second instruction information from a network device, the second instruction information being used to instruct the first terminal device to send the response information to the network device. .
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the network device in the first aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the network device, or a device including the network device.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the above-mentioned first aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (sometimes also referred to as a transceiver unit) and a processing module (sometimes also referred to as a processing unit).
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive multiple uplink signals from multiple terminal devices on the first resource, and each of the uplink signals comes from one of the multiple terminal devices; the processing module is configured to receive The multiple uplink signals determine a downlink precoding matrix, and the downlink precoding matrix is used to send data to multiple terminal devices.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the network in the second aspect.
  • the network device is either an electronic device (eg, a chip system) configured in the network device, or a larger device including the network device.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the above second aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (sometimes also referred to as a transceiver unit) and a processing module (sometimes also referred to as a processing unit).
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive a downlink precoding indication from the first terminal device, where the downlink precoding indication is used to indicate a downlink precoding matrix; and the processing module is configured to provide a downlink precoding matrix according to the downlink precoding matrix.
  • a plurality of terminal devices send the first data, and the plurality of terminal devices include the first terminal device.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the third aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the terminal device, or a device including the terminal.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the above third aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (sometimes also referred to as a transceiver unit) and a processing module (sometimes also referred to as a processing unit).
  • the transceiver module is configured to send a first uplink signal sequence to the network device under the control of the processing module.
  • the first uplink signal sequence occupies multiple resource elements in the frequency domain, and sends the first uplink signal sequence to the network device.
  • a second uplink signal sequence, the second uplink signal sequence occupies multiple resource elements in the frequency domain, and the phase difference between the first uplink signal sequence and the second uplink signal sequence on resource elements with the same index value is not 2n ⁇ , n is an integer, and the phase difference between the first uplink signal sequence on the resource elements of the first index value and the second index value and the second uplink signal sequence on the first index value and
  • the difference between the phase differences on the resource elements of the second index value is 2m ⁇ , and m is an integer.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the fourth aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the terminal device, or a device including the terminal.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the above fourth aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (sometimes also referred to as a transceiver unit) and a processing module (sometimes also referred to as a processing unit).
  • the processing module is used to determine M elements of the first matrix corresponding to the first terminal device, wherein the M elements are located at M positions in the first matrix, and the M positions are all Differently, the first matrix includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element, each of the non-zero elements is a merging coefficient, and the merging coefficient is a merging coefficient of a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector, and M is Positive integer; the transceiver module is configured to send a first uplink signal to the network device on the first resource, where the first uplink signal is an analog signal, and the first uplink signal is used to indicate the M element.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the fifth aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the terminal device, or a device including the terminal.
  • the communication device includes corresponding means or modules for performing the above fifth aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (sometimes also referred to as a transceiver unit) and a processing module (sometimes also referred to as a processing unit).
  • the processing module is used to determine M summation results, wherein each summation result is the sum of multiple elements, and the multiple elements are in one-to-one correspondence with multiple first matrices.
  • Each element among the elements is one of the M elements in the corresponding first matrix, and the M elements are located at M positions in the corresponding first matrix, and the M positions are all different, Any two elements among the plurality of elements have the same position in their corresponding first matrices, and each first matrix among the plurality of first matrices corresponds to one terminal device among the plurality of terminal devices, each The first matrix includes at least one zero element and/or at least one non-zero element. Each non-zero element is a merging coefficient.
  • the merging coefficient is a merging coefficient of a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector.
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the transceiver module is used to send a precoding matrix indication to the network device.
  • the precoding matrix indication is determined based on the M summation results.
  • the precoding matrix indication is used to indicate the downlink precoding matrix, so The above downlink precoding matrix is used to send data.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the device described in the sixth aspect and the device described in the eighth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the device described in the sixth aspect and the device described in the ninth aspect.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, which includes the device described in the seventh aspect and the device described in the tenth aspect.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication device, including a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit them to the processor or Send signals from the processor to other communication devices other than the communication device, and the processor is used to implement the above-mentioned first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, and third aspect through logic circuits or executing code instructions.
  • the communication device also includes other components, such as antennas, input and output modules, memory, etc.
  • these components can be hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, which includes: a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is used to call and run instructions from the interface.
  • the processor executes the instructions, the implementation of any one of the above first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, fourth aspect or fifth aspect is implemented. method described.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions. When run, the computer-readable storage medium implements the above-mentioned first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect. The method described in any one of the third aspect, the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a computer, implement the above-mentioned first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, fourth aspect or fifth aspect. any of the methods described.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the antenna structure of the UE and network equipment provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a third space-frequency combining coefficient matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is an example diagram of multiple UEs sending uplink reference signals provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic flow chart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figures 9 and 10 are schematic structural diagrams of two communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Massive multiple input multiple output is an expansion technology of MIMO.
  • Massive MIMO is a key technology in the fifth generation mobile communications ( 5th generation, 5G) to improve system throughput and spectrum utilization.
  • the transmitting device and the receiving device each include multiple antennas, and the multiple antennas of the transmitting device can each independently transmit signals.
  • the receiving device can also use multiple antennas to receive and recover signals.
  • the sending device (such as network equipment) can precode the signal to be sent with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel state when the channel state is known, so that the precoded signal to be sent is consistent with
  • the channels are adapted to each other, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as a terminal device) in eliminating inter-channel effects. Therefore, by precoding the signal to be sent, the signal quality of the signal received by the receiving device (such as a terminal device) can be improved.
  • the signal quality is, for example, through parameters such as signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR). to measure.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • Massive MIMO uses multiple antennas of the receiving device to receive signals, so the signal quality of the signal received by the receiving device is required to be good, otherwise reception failure is likely to occur.
  • Precoding technology is conducive to improving the signal quality of the signal received by the receiving device, so the use of precoding technology is conducive to realizing massive MIMO.
  • the channel matrix involved in the embodiment of the present application may be an uplink channel matrix or a downlink channel matrix.
  • Frequency domain unit is the unit of frequency domain resources of equipment (such as terminal equipment), and can be understood as the granularity of frequency domain resources.
  • the frequency domain length of a frequency domain unit is a times the frequency domain length of a subband, the frequency domain length of a resource block (RB), and the frequency domain length of a resource element (RE).
  • b times the domain length, the frequency domain length of a subcarrier, the frequency domain length of a resource block group (RBG), or the frequency domain length of a precoding resource block group (PRG), etc.
  • a ⁇ 1 for example, the value of a is 1 or 1/2, etc.
  • b is a positive integer.
  • the frequency domain length of the subband is not fixed, and the frequency domain length of the subband may be equal to the frequency domain length of one or more RBs.
  • a spatial layer can be regarded as an independently transmittable data stream, a polarization direction of a transmitting antenna, or a logical channel.
  • network devices can send data to terminal devices through multiple spatial layers at the same time.
  • the number of spatial layers is less than or equal to the rank of the channel matrix.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of spatial layers according to the channel matrix, and further determine the precoding matrix.
  • the channel matrix involved in the embodiment of the present application may be an uplink channel matrix or a downlink channel matrix.
  • the precoding matrix can be determined based on the channel matrix.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing (singular value decomposition, SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or it can also be obtained by performing eigenvalue decomposition (EVD) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. way to obtain.
  • the channel matrix may be determined by channel estimation based on the reference signal.
  • H represents the channel matrix
  • X represents the reference signal sent by the sending device to the receiving device
  • X -1 represents the inverse matrix of the reference signal
  • Y represents the signal corresponding to the reference signal actually received by the receiving device.
  • the channel matrix of one of the uplink channel or the downlink channel is used as the channel matrix of the other of the uplink channel or the downlink channel.
  • a precoding matrix may include one or more vectors, such as column vectors.
  • a precoding matrix can be used to determine one or more precoding vectors.
  • the precoding matrix is the precoding vector.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix on one spatial layer.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one polarization direction.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one spatial layer and one polarization direction.
  • the precoding vector can also be determined by the vector in the precoding matrix, for example, it is obtained by mathematically transforming the vector in the precoding matrix. This application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
  • the space-frequency component matrix is determined by one or more spatial domain vectors selected from the spatial domain vector set and one or more frequency domain vectors selected from the frequency domain vector set.
  • the air domain vector set and the frequency domain vector set may be configured in the device by a protocol.
  • the selected one or more spatial domain vectors and the selected one or more frequency domain vectors can construct one or more space-frequency component matrices, where a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector are called a space-frequency vector pair. .
  • the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix or channel matrix.
  • the terminal device can determine the space-frequency matrix through the precoding matrix or the channel matrix.
  • the network device may perform a weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices to obtain a space-frequency matrix, which is used to restore the channel matrix or precoding matrix.
  • the selected one or more spatial domain vectors may constitute a spatial domain matrix W 1 , where each column vector in W 1 corresponds to a selected spatial domain vector.
  • the selected one or more frequency domain vectors may form a frequency domain matrix W 3 , where each column vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector.
  • the result of the linear combination of the selected one or more spatial domain vectors and the selected one or more frequency domain vectors can be called the space-frequency matrix K.
  • a calculation formula of the space-frequency matrix K is as follows:
  • H represents the conjugate transpose
  • It can represent a space-frequency combining coefficient matrix composed of multiple space-frequency combining coefficients.
  • One row in the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix can correspond to a spatial domain vector in a certain polarization direction, and one column in the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix can correspond to a frequency domain vector.
  • the frequency domain vector and spatial domain vector corresponding to each spatial layer in the multiple spatial layers are selected to construct the position of the space-frequency vector pair of the precoding matrix and the merging coefficient of each space-frequency vector pair (also can be called non-zero coefficients or space-frequency combining coefficients) position correspondence.
  • the position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix specifically refers to the position of the spatial domain vector of the precoding matrix used to construct in the spatial domain vector reported by the terminal device and the frequency of the precoding matrix used to construct.
  • the position of the domain vector in the frequency domain vector reported by the terminal device Since each space-frequency vector pair corresponds to a combining coefficient, the position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix is also the position of the non-zero coefficient.
  • w 0 to w N-1 are N f column vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units.
  • Each column vector can be a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit, and the length of each column vector can be Ns .
  • the N f column vectors respectively correspond to the precoding vectors of N f frequency domain units. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix formed by combining the precoding vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units.
  • the space-frequency matrix can correspond to the spatial layer. Since the terminal device can determine the space-frequency matrix based on feedback of frequency domain vectors, spatial domain vectors and merging coefficients of each spatial layer, the space-frequency matrix can be considered to correspond to the spatial layer.
  • the network device determines the space-frequency matrix based on the frequency domain vector, spatial domain vector and merging coefficient of a spatial layer fed back by the terminal device, which is equivalent to the network device determining the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer.
  • the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer can be directly used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit may be constructed, for example, from the column vectors corresponding to the same frequency domain unit in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer.
  • the calculation method of the precoding matrix corresponding to the N f frequency domain units of the transmitting device can also be referred to the above formula (2).
  • nth (0 ⁇ n ⁇ N 3 -1, and n is an integer) column vector in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer, and arrange it from left to right in the order of the spatial layer to obtain the dimension is a matrix of N s ⁇ Z, Z represents the number of spatial layers, Z ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
  • the matrix is normalized, for example, multiplied by a power normalization coefficient, etc., to obtain the precoding matrix of the nth frequency domain unit.
  • the space-frequency matrix is only a representation of intermediate quantities used to determine the precoding matrix or the channel matrix, and should not constitute any limitation on the embodiments of the present application.
  • a vector with a length of N s ⁇ N f can also be obtained, which can be called Space frequency vector.
  • the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and space-frequency vector shown above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation on the embodiments of the present application.
  • the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix with dimensions N f ⁇ N s .
  • Each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit, and is used to determine the precoding matrix of the corresponding frequency domain unit.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2N s ⁇ N f or N f ⁇ 2N s . It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna.
  • Antenna port which can be referred to as port for short, can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • One antenna port can be preconfigured for each virtual antenna, where each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas.
  • the antenna port can also be called the port of the reference signal.
  • the reference signal may be a non-precoded reference signal or a precoded reference signal, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Spatial domain vectors can also be called spatial domain component vectors, beam vectors, spatial beam basis vectors, spatial basis vectors or spatial bases, etc.
  • Each element in the air domain vector can represent the weight of each antenna port (antenna port) of the transmitting device.
  • the receiving device can linearly superpose the signals of each antenna port of the transmitting device based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the air domain vector, which can form an area with stronger signals in a certain direction in space.
  • the spatial domain vector is such as a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) vector.
  • DFT vector may refer to a vector in a DFT matrix.
  • Frequency domain vector also known as frequency domain component vector, frequency domain basis vector, Or frequency domain base, etc., which can be used to represent the changing pattern of the channel in the frequency domain.
  • Each frequency domain vector can represent a change pattern.
  • the frequency domain vectors corresponding to the terminal equipment in different spatial layers may be the same or different.
  • the space-frequency combination coefficient matrix can also be called the space-frequency joint coefficient matrix, or weighted coefficient matrix, etc.
  • the space-frequency merging coefficient matrix includes at least one element, and each element in the at least one element is a non-zero element or a zero element, wherein each non-zero element can be called a merging coefficient (also called a non-zero coefficient or a space-frequency merger coefficient).
  • one space-frequency merging coefficient in the space-frequency merging coefficient matrix corresponds to a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector.
  • a non-zero element in the space-frequency merging coefficient matrix may be the merging coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair consisting of the i-th spatial domain vector and the j-th frequency domain vector.
  • the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix determined by the terminal device based on the downlink signal is called the first matrix (also called the first space-frequency combining coefficient matrix or the downlink reference signal).
  • Space-frequency merging coefficient matrix the frequency domain vector corresponding to the first space-frequency merging coefficient matrix may also be called the downlink frequency domain vector or the first frequency domain vector, and the spatial domain vector corresponding to the first matrix may also be called the downlink spatial domain vector or the first frequency domain vector.
  • the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix determined by the network equipment (such as the base station) based on the uplink signal can be called the second matrix (it can also be called the second space-frequency combining coefficient matrix or the uplink space-frequency combining coefficient matrix).
  • the frequency domain vector corresponding to the second matrix may also be called the uplink frequency domain vector or the second frequency domain vector
  • the spatial domain vector corresponding to the second matrix may also be called the uplink spatial domain vector or the second spatial domain vector.
  • Precoding matrix indicator which can be used to determine the precoding matrix.
  • the terminal device may determine the precoding matrix and indicate the precoding matrix to the network device through the PMI, and the network device may restore the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device may be the same as or similar to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device.
  • PMI is only a nomenclature and should not constitute any limitation on the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiments of this application do not exclude the possibility of defining information with other names in future agreements for the same or similar functions.
  • Terminal equipment is a device with wireless transceiver functions. It can be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device, a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device built into the above-mentioned devices (for example, a communication module or a chip system, etc. ).
  • the terminal device is used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), Internet of things (IoT), virtual reality (VR), Augmented reality (AR), industrial control, self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, Terminal equipment for smart cities, drones, robots and other scenarios.
  • the terminal equipment may sometimes be called user equipment (UE), customer premise equipment (CPE), terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication equipment, or user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • CPE customer premise equipment
  • Network equipment includes access network elements (or is called access network equipment) and/or core network elements (or is called core network equipment).
  • the access network element is a device with wireless transceiver functions and is used to communicate with the UE.
  • the access network Elements include but are not limited to base stations (BTS, Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), transceiver points (t(R)ANsmission reception point, TRP) in the above communication systems, 3GPP subsequent evolution base stations, wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) access node, wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, etc. in the system.
  • the base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, etc.
  • Multiple base stations may support the network of the same access technology mentioned above, or may support the network of different access technologies mentioned above.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-located or non-co-located transmission and reception points.
  • the network device can also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (CU) in a cloud radio access network (C(R)AN) scenario, which can also be called a convergence unit, and/or a distribution unit. (distributed unit, DU).
  • Network devices can also be servers, wearable devices, or vehicle-mounted devices, etc.
  • the network equipment in vehicle-to-everything V2X technology can be a road side unit (RSU).
  • the following description takes the access network equipment as a base station as an example.
  • the multiple network devices in the communication system may be base stations of the same type or different types of base stations.
  • the base station can communicate with the UE or communicate with the UE through the relay station.
  • a UE can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
  • the core network element is used to implement at least one of mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging functions.
  • the names of devices that implement core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, and the embodiments of this application do not limit this.
  • the core network elements include: access and mobility management function (AMF), session management function (SMF), PCF or user plane function , UPF) etc.
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device that can support the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the device for realizing the functions of the network device being a network device as an example.
  • the number of nouns means “singular noun or plural noun", that is, “one or more”, unless otherwise specified.
  • At least one means one or more
  • plural means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the relationship between associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • A/B means: A or B.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
  • at least one of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
  • first uplink signal and “second uplink signal” in the embodiment of this application are used to represent two signals, and do not limit the type, sending order, receiving order or priority of the two signals.
  • the network device can configure the same resource (for example, the first resource) for multiple UEs.
  • Uplink signals can be sent to the network device on the same resource.
  • the network device can determine a downlink precoding matrix based on the uplink signals of these multiple UEs.
  • the network device can use this downlink precoding matrix when sending data to these multiple UEs.
  • the matrix precodes the data. That is to say, the network device does not need to determine the precoding matrix for each UE separately, but determines a downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple UEs. In this way, it is helpful to simplify the network device to determine the precoding matrix for multiple UEs.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application, or can be understood as an architecture diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes multiple UEs and a network device 120 serving the multiple UEs.
  • FIG. 1 takes multiple UEs including a first UE111 and a second UE112 as an example.
  • Network device 120 includes one or more antennas, where the one or more antennas included in network device 120 may have one or more polarization directions.
  • a UE may include one or more antennas, and the one or more antennas included in the UE may have one or more polarization directions.
  • the first UE111 can communicate with the network device 120
  • the second UE112 can communicate with the network device 120.
  • the network device 120 can configure a UE group, or the UE group can also be specified by a protocol.
  • one UE group includes multiple UEs, for example, one UE group includes the first UE 111 and the second UE 112.
  • the network device 120 may send grouping information to multiple UEs in the UE group.
  • the grouping information is used to indicate the group identifier of the UE group, which is equivalent to indicating the UE group to which one UE belongs. In this way, the network device 120 can multicast the UE group through the group identifier of the UE group.
  • the grouping information also includes identities of all UEs in the UE group.
  • the grouping information includes the identities of all UEs in the UE group.
  • UEs in a UE group can communicate with each other.
  • sidelink (SL) communication can be used between any two UEs in the UE group.
  • network device 120 may update the UE group. Updating a UE group may include the network device 120 increasing or decreasing the number of UEs included in the UE group, and/or the network device replacing original UEs in the UE group with new UEs.
  • the UE's uplink channel may change, the UE's downlink channel may change, or the services performed by the UE may change, it may cause Network device 120 updates the UE group.
  • the network device 120 may send data to the UE group in a multicast manner.
  • the multicast in the embodiment of this application can also be called multicast.
  • the network device 120 may also send data to the UEs in the UE group in a unicast manner.
  • the methods provided by various embodiments of this application can be applied to the scenario shown in Figure 1.
  • the multiple UEs involved in various embodiments of the present application include a first UE and a second UE.
  • the first UE and the second UE in various embodiments of the present application are, for example, any UE in the scenario shown in Figure 1.
  • the network device involved in various embodiments of the present application is, for example, the network device 120 shown in Figure 1 .
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flow chart of the method.
  • the network device sends information 1.
  • multiple UEs receive information 1.
  • This information 1 may indicate the first resource used to send uplink signals.
  • Information 1 can also be called the fourth information.
  • the network device may send information 1 through first signaling.
  • the first signaling is, for example, high-level signaling, and the high-level signaling is, for example, radio resource control (RRC) signaling or media access control (media access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE), etc.; or , the first signaling is, for example, physical layer signaling, and the physical layer signaling is, for example, downlink control information (DCI), etc.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC media access control element
  • CE control element
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the first resource indicated by information 1 may be a semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) resource. That is to say, any UE among multiple UEs may use the first resource to send multiple uplink signals to the network device. or, The first resource indicated by information 1 is a dynamically scheduled resource. That is to say, any UE among multiple UEs can use the first resource to send an uplink signal to the network device once.
  • the first resource may include one or more of time domain resources, frequency domain resources or code domain resources.
  • the units of time domain resources are, for example, slots, frames, subframes, mini-slots, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or transmissions. Time interval (transmission time interval, TTI), etc.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain resource is, for example, a frequency domain unit. The meaning of the frequency domain unit may be referred to the above.
  • the network device may send information 1 to the first UE and the second UE respectively in a unicast manner.
  • S201 may include S201a and S201b, where S201a is the network device sending information to the first UE. 1.
  • the first UE receives information 1 from the network device;
  • S201b is the network device sending information 1 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives information 1 from the network device.
  • the execution order of S201a and S201b can be arbitrary, for example, S201a and S201b are executed at the same time; or S201a is executed first, and then S201b is executed; or S201b is executed first, and then S201a is executed.
  • the network device may send information 1 to the UE group where the first UE and the second UE belong to in a multicast manner.
  • the first signaling may include the identification of the UE group, which is equivalent to the network device sending information 1 to the first UE and the second UE.
  • the following is an example of how to configure a UE group on a network device.
  • the first UE and the second UE are configured in the same UE group as an example for introduction.
  • Method 1 The network device configures UEs that perform the same service among multiple UEs in a UE group. In other words, UEs included in a UE group perform the same service.
  • a UE performs a service, which can be understood as the UE is currently used to implement the service.
  • Businesses include, for example, extended reality (XR), live online video services, online classes, online meetings, or cloud games.
  • XR business can include one or more of virtual reality (VR) business, augmented reality (AR) business or mixed reality (MR) business.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • MR mixed reality
  • the network device determines that the data to be sent to the first UE and the second UE correspond to the same application, indicating that the first UE and the second UE need to perform the same service.
  • the network device may configure the first UE and the second UE. in a UE group.
  • the network device determines that data of the same application corresponding to the XR service needs to be sent to the first UE and the second UE, the network device determines to configure the first UE and the second UE in a UE group.
  • Method 2 The network device configures UEs whose channel correlations are greater than the first threshold among multiple UEs in a UE group. In other words, the channel correlation among any two UEs in the UE group is greater than the first threshold.
  • the channel is, for example, an uplink channel or a downlink channel.
  • the network device may determine the channel matrix of the first UE and the channel matrix of the second UE, and determine the correlation of the channel matrices between the first UE and the second UE. For example, the network device determines the similarity of the channel matrices of the first UE and the second UE as the channel matrix correlation between the first UE and the second UE. If the channel correlation between the first UE and the second UE is greater than the first threshold, the network device may configure the first UE and the second UE in one UE group.
  • the manner in which the network device determines the channel matrices of the first UE and the second UE may be the same.
  • the network device determines the channel matrix of the first UE as an example.
  • the network device may determine the channel matrix of the first UE based on an uplink reference signal (eg, a first uplink reference signal) from the first UE.
  • the first uplink reference signal is, for example, SRS.
  • Method 3 The network device selects UEs whose channel correlation is greater than the first threshold among multiple UEs and needs to perform the same service.
  • UEs are configured in a UE group.
  • a UE group includes multiple UEs that need to perform the same service, and the channel correlation between any two UEs is greater than the first threshold.
  • the method by which the network device determines the UE among multiple UEs that needs to perform the same service and determines the channel correlation among any two UEs among the multiple UEs can be referred to the above and will not be listed here.
  • S202 Multiple UEs respectively send uplink signals to the network device on the first resource.
  • the network device receives uplink signals from multiple UEs on the first resource.
  • Figure 2 takes multiple UEs including a first UE and a second UE as an example.
  • S202 may include S202a and S202b, wherein S202a is the first UE sending the first uplink signal U1 to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the first uplink signal U1 from the first UE; S202b is the second UE sending the first uplink signal U1 to the network device.
  • the second uplink signal U2 correspondingly, the network device receives the second uplink signal U2 from the second UE.
  • the execution order of S202a and S202b can be arbitrary, for example, S202a and S202b are executed simultaneously; or S202a is executed first, and then S202b is executed; or S202b is executed first, and then S202a is executed.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 can be superimposed on the first resource to form a third uplink signal U3.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 can be superimposed on the first resource, which is equivalent to the network device receiving the superposition result of the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 on the first resource.
  • this embodiment of the present application calls the superposition result of the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 as the third uplink signal U3.
  • the third uplink signal U3 includes one or more of the first superposition result, the second superposition result and the third superposition result.
  • the first superposition result is the superposition result of the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 in the frequency domain or time domain.
  • the second superposition result is the superposition result of the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 in the antenna domain or beam domain.
  • the third superposition result is the superposition result of the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 in the code domain.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 can be expressed in a complex form (for example, a complex vector or a complex matrix) in the frequency domain, time domain, antenna domain, beam domain or code domain.
  • the third uplink signal U3 can be regarded as the sum of complex numbers.
  • the third uplink signal U3 corresponds to a complex vector. If the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 are complex matrixes, then the third uplink signal U3 corresponds to a complex matrix.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 are both uplink reference signals.
  • the uplink reference signal is, for example, SRS or demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 are both analog signals, and the first uplink signal U1 is used to indicate M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE, and the second uplink signal U1
  • the signal U2 is used to indicate M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE are carried on the analog signal, and M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE are carried on the analog signal.
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the meaning of the first matrix can refer to the content discussed above.
  • the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 are all different in the M positions in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE. Furthermore, the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 are all different in the M positions in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 are in M positions in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE, and the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 are in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • M positions are the same. It can be further understood that the position of each of the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE is the same as the position of each of the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2.
  • the positions in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE are the same.
  • the M positions include position (1, 2), which corresponds to the second element in the first row of the first matrix corresponding to the first UE, and also corresponds to the first element in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • the 2nd element in the row is the position (1, 2), which corresponds to the second element in the first row of the first matrix corresponding to the first UE, and also corresponds to the first element in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • the 2nd element in the row are examples of the rows.
  • the M locations may be configured by a network device for multiple UEs, or determined by multiple UEs through negotiation, or configured in multiple UEs by a protocol, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first uplink signal U1 may be used to indicate the M elements of the first matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers
  • the second uplink signal U2 is M elements in the first matrix indicating that the second UE is on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers.
  • P is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • K is a positive integer less than or equal to P.
  • the first UE and the second UE each correspond to P spatial layers
  • the first UE and the second UE each correspond to P first matrices.
  • one first matrix among the P first matrices corresponding to the first UE corresponds to one spatial layer among the P spatial layers corresponding to the first UE.
  • One of the P first matrices corresponding to the second UE corresponds to one of the P spatial layers corresponding to the second UE.
  • the first uplink signal U1 indicates the M positions of the first UE corresponding to the M elements in the first matrix on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers
  • the second uplink signal U2 indicates The M positions corresponding to the M elements in the first matrix on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers of the second UE may be the same.
  • the M positions can be understood as the first matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers and the Kth matrix of the second UE on the P spatial layers indicated by the second uplink signal U2. The same M positions of the first matrix on the spatial layers.
  • the M positions of the first UE and the second UE in the first matrix on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers both include the 1st position in the 1st row of the first matrix, and the 2nd The 3rd position in the row.
  • the M positions corresponding to the first matrix of the first UE on any two of the P spatial layers are the same, and the second UE is on any two of the P spatial layers.
  • the M positions corresponding to the first matrix are the same. It can be further understood that the M positions correspond to the P first matrices of the first UE and also correspond to the P first matrices of the second UE.
  • the first UE includes two spatial layers (equivalent to a value of P being 2), specifically a first spatial layer and a second spatial layer.
  • the M positions corresponding to the first matrix of the first UE on the first spatial layer include the 1st position in the 1st row of the first matrix on the first spatial layer, and the 1st position in the 2nd row. 3 locations.
  • the M positions corresponding to the first matrix of the first UE on the second spatial layer also include the 1st position in the 1st row of the first matrix on the first spatial layer, and the 1st position in the 2nd row. 3rd position.
  • the first uplink signal U1 may be used to indicate the M elements of the first matrix of the first UE on one antenna (or antenna port) among the R antennas (or antenna ports), And the second uplink signal U2 is used to indicate the M elements of the first matrix of the second UE on one antenna (or antenna port) among the T antennas (or antenna ports).
  • R and T are both positive integers, and the values of R and T can be the same or different.
  • the first UE includes R antennas (or antenna ports), and the first UE also corresponds to R first matrices.
  • the second UE includes T antennas (or antenna ports), and the second UE also corresponds to T first matrices.
  • the first UE One of the corresponding R first matrices corresponds to one of the R antennas (or antenna ports) corresponding to the first UE.
  • One of the T first matrices corresponding to the second UE corresponds to one of the T antennas (or antenna ports) corresponding to the second UE.
  • the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 are at M positions of the first matrix on one antenna (or antenna port) of the first UE
  • the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 are at the M positions of the first matrix.
  • the M positions of the first matrix on one antenna (or antenna port) of two UEs may be the same.
  • the M positions correspond to the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 in the first matrix on one of the R antennas (or antenna ports) of the first UE.
  • the positions also correspond to the M positions in the first matrix of the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 on one of the T antennas (or antenna ports) of the second UE.
  • the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix based on the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2.
  • the downlink precoding matrix is used by the network device to send data to multiple UEs. It can be further understood that the downlink precoding matrix is used by the network device to perform downlink transmission on the first UE and the second UE.
  • the downlink transmission for example, transmits a physical downlink control channel. (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) or physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH), etc.
  • the downlink precoding matrix is a precoding matrix shared by the first UE and the second UE.
  • the network device may precode the data to be sent by the first UE and the second UE according to the downlink precoding matrix.
  • Example 1 the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 are both reference signals in the above-mentioned first possible implementation manner.
  • the network device may combine the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 to determine the first uplink channel matrix.
  • the network device can use the third uplink signal U3 as Y in the above formula (1), and the first uplink signal U1 or the second uplink signal U2 as the X in the above formula (1), so that based on the above formula (1)
  • the first uplink channel matrix is determined.
  • the first uplink channel matrix is equivalent to representing channels of multiple UEs, or can be regarded as the sum of channel matrices of multiple UEs.
  • the network device may obtain the first downlink channel matrix based on the reciprocity of the uplink channel and the downlink channel.
  • the network device may perform eigenvalue decomposition or SVD on the covariance matrix of the first downlink channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device performs eigenvalue decomposition or SVD on the first downlink channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 are both analog signals in the above second possible implementation, and the first uplink signal U1 is used to indicate M elements of the first matrix of the first UE, and The second uplink signal U2 is used to indicate M elements of the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the network device determines the i-th element among the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 and the j-th element among the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 based on the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2.
  • the sum of elements, i and j can be taken from 1 to M in sequence. Among them, the values of i and j can be the same or different.
  • the network device can obtain M summation results.
  • the position of the i-th element in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE is the same as the position of the j-th element in the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix based on these M summation results and M positions.
  • the network device determines a space-frequency combining coefficient matrix based on these M summation results and M positions,
  • the one space-frequency combining coefficient matrix is called a third matrix in the embodiment of this application.
  • M summation results are M elements in the third matrix.
  • the M positions corresponding to the M summation results in the third matrix are the same as the M positions mentioned above. Among them, a summation result is a merged coefficient in the third matrix. Then, the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix according to the third matrix.
  • the first uplink signal U1 may be used to indicate that the first UE is on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers, M elements in the first matrix
  • the second uplink signal U2 is used to indicate the second
  • the determined third matrix can be understood as a space-frequency combining coefficient matrix on one spatial layer.
  • the network device may determine a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector corresponding to each of the M summation results in the third matrix from the spatial domain vector set and the frequency domain vector set. By analogy, the network device can determine M spatial domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors corresponding to the M summation results.
  • these M spatial domain vectors constitute a spatial domain matrix
  • these M frequency domain vectors constitute a frequency domain matrix.
  • the spatial domain vector set and the frequency domain vector set may be pre-configured in the network device, for example, through a protocol.
  • the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix based on the third matrix, the spatial domain matrix composed of M spatial domain vectors, and the frequency domain matrix composed of M frequency domain vectors. For example, the network device can substitute the third matrix, the spatial domain matrix composed of M spatial domain vectors, and the frequency domain matrix composed of M frequency domain vectors into the above formula (2) to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the antenna structure of a UE and network equipment provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device includes 2*N1*N2 antennas, and all antennas included in the network device include two polarization directions. Among them, "*" means product.
  • the antenna structure of the first UE is illustrated.
  • the first UE includes N3 antennas, and all antennas included in the first UE include two polarization directions.
  • a line with an arrow can be regarded as a spatial layer.
  • the M elements indicated by the first uplink signal U1 include the element at the 3rd position of row 1, the element at the 6th position of row 2, and the element at the 6th position of row 2 of the first matrix of the first UE on spatial layer 1.
  • the element at position 8 of row Nt includes 2*N1*N2.
  • the M elements indicated by the second uplink signal U2 include the elements at the 3rd position of row 1, the elements at the 6th position of row 2, and the second UE's first matrix on spatial layer 1.
  • the network device can determine, based on the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2, that the element at the third position in row 1 of the first matrix of spatial layer 1 corresponding to the first UE and the spatial layer corresponding to the second UE The sum of the elements at the 3rd position in row 1 of the first matrix of 1, the element at the 6th position in the 2nd row of the first matrix of 1 in the spatial layer corresponding to the first UE and the spatial layer corresponding to the second UE The sum of the elements at the 6th position of the 2nd row of the first matrix of 1, the element at the 8th position of the Ntth row of the first matrix of 1 in the spatial layer corresponding to the first UE and the spatial layer corresponding to the second UE The sum of the elements at the 8th position of the Ntth row of the first matrix of 1 is equivalent to the network device obtaining 4 summation results.
  • the network device determines the third matrix on spatial layer 1 as shown in Figure 4 based on the four summation results corresponding to spatial layer 1.
  • the rectangular box filled with dotted lines represents the position of the four summation results determined by the network device in the third matrix.
  • the network device can determine the spatial domain matrix and the frequency domain matrix corresponding to the third matrix on the spatial layer 1 based on the third matrix on the spatial layer 1, and then based on the third matrix on the spatial layer 1, the spatial domain matrix and the frequency domain matrix corresponding to the spatial layer 1
  • the spatial domain matrix and frequency domain matrix on spatial layer 1 determine the downlink precoding matrix on spatial layer 1.
  • the first uplink signal U1 indicates that the first UE is in the 6th row of the first matrix on spatial layer 2.
  • the second uplink signal U2 indicates that the second UE has an element at the 7th position of row 1, an element at the 9th position of row 1, and an element at the 6th position of row 2 of the first matrix on spatial layer 2. elements, and the element at the 8th position of row Nt.
  • the network device may determine, according to the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2, that the element at the 7th position of the first row of the first matrix of the first UE on the spatial layer 2 is the same as the 7th position element of the second UE on the spatial layer 2.
  • the sum of the elements at the 7th position in the 1st row of a matrix, the element at the 6th position in the 2nd row of the first matrix of the first UE on the spatial layer 2 and the 6th position of the second UE on the spatial layer 2 The sum of the elements at the 6th position in the 2nd row of a matrix, the element at the 9th position in the 1st row of the first matrix of the first UE on spatial layer 2 and the second UE on the spatial layer 2.
  • the sum of the elements at the 9th position in the 1st row of a matrix, and the element at the 8th position in the Ntth row of the first matrix of the first UE on the spatial layer 2 and the second UE on the spatial layer 2 The sum of the elements at the 8th position of the Ntth row of the first matrix, so that the network device can obtain 3 summation results.
  • the network device can determine the third matrix on spatial layer 2 as shown in Figure 4 based on the three summation results corresponding to spatial layer 2.
  • the network device can determine the spatial domain matrix and frequency domain matrix corresponding to the third matrix on spatial layer 2 based on the third matrix on spatial layer 2, and then based on the third matrix on spatial layer 2 and the third matrix on spatial layer 2
  • the spatial domain matrix and frequency domain matrix corresponding to the three matrices determine the downlink precoding matrix on spatial layer 2.
  • the first uplink signal U1 is used to indicate that the first UE is on one antenna (or antenna port) of R antennas (or antenna ports), M elements in the first matrix, and the second uplink
  • the third matrix determined by the network device is equivalent to A third matrix corresponding to an antenna pair, where the antenna pair includes an antenna in the first UE and an antenna in the second UE.
  • the network device may determine the spatial domain matrix and the frequency domain matrix corresponding to the third matrix, and obtain the channel matrix corresponding to the antenna pair based on the third matrix, the spatial domain matrix, and the frequency domain matrix.
  • the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrix based on the channel matrix corresponding to the antenna pair.
  • the method of determining the spatial domain matrix and the frequency domain matrix corresponding to the third matrix may refer to the content discussed above.
  • the way in which the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix is different, which will be described separately below.
  • Case 1 When the first UE and the second UE have the same number of antennas, and both the first UE and the second UE have only one antenna (that is, R and T are both 1), the network device can determine the number of antennas corresponding to one antenna pair. A channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix. For example, the network device can use the maximum ratio combining algorithm (maximal ratio combining, MRC) to process the channel matrix corresponding to the antenna pair to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • maximum ratio combining algorithm maximal ratio combining, MRC
  • the network device may determine R channel matrices, which correspond to R antenna pairs, where each channel matrix corresponds to one antenna pair, and each of the R antenna pairs includes R antennas of the first UE. and one of the T antennas of the second UE.
  • the method for the network device to determine each of the R channel matrices may refer to the content of the network device determining the channel matrix corresponding to an antenna pair discussed above, which will not be listed here.
  • the network equipment can perform singular value decomposition or eigenvalue decomposition on the R channel matrices to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device performs singular value decomposition or eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrices of the R channel matrices to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • Case 3 When the number of antennas of the first UE and the second UE is different, and it is assumed that the number of R antennas of the first UE is greater than the number of T antennas of the second UE (that is, R is greater than T). Under this assumption, network equipment can obtain F channel matrices. Among them, the value of F is determined based on R and/or T. The network equipment can perform singular value decomposition or eigenvalue decomposition on the F channel matrices to obtain the downlink precoding matrix. Alternatively, the network device performs singular value decomposition or eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrices of the F channel matrices to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • F equals T.
  • F channel matrices correspond to T antenna pairs, and each channel matrix corresponds to one antenna pair.
  • Each of the T antenna pairs includes one of the R antennas of the first UE and one of the T antennas of the second UE.
  • the method for determining each of the F channel matrices can refer to the content of determining the channel matrix corresponding to an antenna pair in case 1 above, which will not be listed here.
  • T channel matrices among the F channel matrices can correspond to T antenna pairs.
  • the meaning of the T channel matrices and the determination method of each of the T channel matrices can be referred to the previous example. The content discussed will not be listed here.
  • each of the remaining (F-T) channel matrices among the F channel matrices may be a channel matrix corresponding to one of the remaining (R-T) antennas in the first UE.
  • the remaining (F-T) channel matrices refer to the channel matrices other than the T channel matrices among the F channel matrices.
  • the network device determines the channel matrix corresponding to the (T+1)th antenna of the first UE based on the (T+1)th uplink signal sent from the first UE.
  • the network device can obtain (F-T) channel matrices of the first UE.
  • the (T+1)th uplink signal may be an uplink reference signal; or, the (T+1)th uplink signal may be an analog signal or a digital signal, and the (T+1)th uplink signal is used for Indicates the non-zero elements or M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the (T+1)th antenna among the R antennas of the first UE.
  • the M positions of the M elements in the first matrix corresponding to the (T+1)th antenna among the R antennas of the first UE may also be the M positions mentioned above.
  • the network device sends the first data.
  • multiple UEs receive the first data from the network device.
  • the first data may be obtained by precoding the data to be sent by the network device based on the first downlink precoding. If the first UE and the second UE correspond to the same service, the first data may be data corresponding to the service, and the data may be in the form of a data stream, for example.
  • the network device may send the first data to multiple UEs in a unicast manner.
  • S204 specifically includes S204a and S204b, where S204a is the network device sending the first data to the first UE, and correspondingly, the first UE receives the first data from the network device; S204b is the network device sending the first data to the second UE. The first data is sent, and accordingly, the second UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • S204a and S204b can be arbitrary, for example, S204a and S204b are executed at the same time; or S204a is executed first, and then S204b is executed; or S204b is executed first, and then S204a is executed.
  • the network device may send the first data to multiple UEs in a multicast manner.
  • the network device may send the first data to the UE group based on the group identifier of the UE group (the UE group includes a first UE and a second UE), which is equivalent to sending the first data to the first UE and the second UE.
  • the first UE can process (such as decoding or displaying) the first part of the first data
  • the second UE can process (such as decoding or displaying) the second part of the first data. show).
  • the first part of data may be part or all of the first data
  • the second part of data may also be part or all of the first data
  • the first part of data and the second part of data may be different.
  • the first UE and the second UE receive the first data from the network device, the first UE and the second UE can selectively process part or all of the first data according to their actual service processing needs.
  • the first UE and the second UE correspond to the XR service.
  • the first UE and the second UE can present interfaces corresponding to the XR service from different perspectives based on the first data.
  • multiple UEs can send uplink signals to the network device on the first resource, which is beneficial to reducing resource overhead for sending uplink signals.
  • the network device can determine a downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple UEs based on the uplink signals from multiple UEs, providing a way to calculate the downlink precoding matrix without the need to determine the downlink precoding matrix individually for each UE.
  • the coding matrix is conducive to simplifying the process of calculating the precoding matrix for network equipment and reducing the cost of calculating the downlink precoding matrix.
  • multiple UEs share a downlink precoding matrix, it is also helpful to reduce the resource overhead of the precoding matrices of multiple UEs.
  • the downlink precoding matrix can be used to The data is processed once and the processed data can be sent to multiple UEs, which is beneficial to reducing the processing load in the precoding process of network equipment.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 are used as the uplink reference signals in the first possible implementation manner as an example for introduction.
  • the network device sends the first downlink reference signal S1 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first downlink reference signal S1 from the network device.
  • the first downlink reference signal S1 is, for example, a channel state information reference signal (channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS).
  • the first UE may send the first downlink reference signal S1 to the network device on the second resource.
  • the meaning of the second resource may refer to the content of the first resource mentioned above.
  • the second resource may be configured by the network device to the first UE.
  • the network device sends the second downlink reference signal S2 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the second downlink reference signal S2 from the network device.
  • the second downlink reference signal S2 is, for example, CSI-RS.
  • the second UE may send the second downlink reference signal S2 to the network device on the third resource.
  • the meaning of the third resource may refer to the content of the first resource mentioned above.
  • the third resource may be configured by the network device to the second UE.
  • the second resource and the third resource are different.
  • the execution order of S501 and S502 can be arbitrary, for example, S501 and S502 are executed at the same time; or S501 is executed first, and then S502 is executed; or S502 is executed first, and then S501 is executed.
  • the first UE sends the first channel quality to the network device.
  • the network device receives the channel quality from the first UE.
  • the channel quality of the first UE is called the first channel quality.
  • the first channel quality is represented by, for example, a channel quality indicator (channel quality indicator, CQI), a reference signal receiving power (RSRP), or a channel matrix.
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the first UE determines the first channel quality of the first UE based on the first downlink reference signal S1, and the network device may receive the first channel quality of the first UE from the first UE.
  • the first UE may send the first uplink reference signal S3 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first uplink reference signal S3 from the first UE, and determines the first uplink reference signal S3 according to the first uplink reference signal.
  • S3 Determine the channel matrix of the first UE, which can be regarded as an example of uplink channel quality.
  • the second UE sends the second channel quality to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second channel quality from the second UE.
  • the channel quality of the second UE is called the second channel quality.
  • the expression method of the second channel quality may refer to the content of the first channel quality mentioned above, and the method of determining the second channel quality by the second UE may refer to the first channel quality mentioned above.
  • the UE determines the content of the first channel quality.
  • the second UE may send the second uplink reference signal S4 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second uplink reference signal S4 from the second UE, and performs the processing according to the second uplink reference signal.
  • S4 Determine the channel matrix of the second UE, which can be regarded as an example of uplink channel quality.
  • S505 The network device determines the first power control parameter and the second power control parameter.
  • the first power control parameter is a power control parameter of the first UE, and the first power control parameter is used to indicate the power of the first UE to send a first uplink signal (such as an uplink reference signal).
  • the second power control parameter is a power control parameter of the second UE, and the second power control parameter is used to indicate the power of the second UE to send the first uplink signal (such as an uplink reference signal).
  • the first power control parameter may include a first desired power and/or a first power difference.
  • the first expected power refers to the power that the network device expects the first UE to send the first uplink signal, or the network device expects to receive the power of the first uplink signal sent by the first UE.
  • the first power difference refers to the power difference between the first UE sending the first uplink signal twice.
  • the second power control parameter may include a second desired power and/or a second power difference.
  • the second expected power refers to the power that the network device expects the second UE to send the first uplink signal, or the network device expects to receive the power of the first uplink signal sent by the second UE.
  • the second power difference refers to the power difference between the second UE sending the first uplink signal twice.
  • first desired power and the second desired power may be the same or different, and the first power difference and the second power difference may also be the same or different.
  • the network device may determine the first power control parameter and the second power control parameter according to the first channel quality and the second channel quality.
  • the network device determines the first power control parameter and the second power control parameter according to the relative magnitudes of the first channel quality and the second channel quality. For example, the network device determines that the first channel quality is higher than the second channel quality (for example, the CQI of the first UE is greater than the CQI of the second UE, or for example, the RSRP of the first UE is greater than the RSRP of the second UE), then determines the first desired The power is less than the second desired power.
  • the network device may determine the first power control parameter according to the first response information of the first UE to the first downlink reference signal S1.
  • the first response information is used to indicate that the first UE successfully received the first downlink reference signal S1 or failed to receive the first downlink reference signal S1.
  • the first response information indicates hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ).
  • NACK Negative response
  • ACK positive response
  • the network device determines that the first response information of the first UE indicates NACK, then the network device determines to increase the first power difference by a preset value; or if the network device determines that the first response information of the first UE indicates ACK, then the network device determines that the first response information of the first UE indicates ACK.
  • the device determines to reduce the first power difference by a preset value. Default values can be preconfigured in network devices.
  • the network device may determine the second power control parameter according to the second response information of the second UE to the second downlink reference signal S2.
  • the meaning of the second response information may refer to the meaning of the first response information mentioned above.
  • the method for the network device to determine the second power control parameter based on the second response information may also refer to the method for the network device to determine the second power control parameter based on the first response information. Control the content of parameters.
  • determining the power control parameters (first power control parameters and second power control parameters) of all UEs among multiple UEs is taken as an example for introduction.
  • the network device may determine the power control parameters of some of the plurality of UEs. For example, the network device only determines the first power control parameter of the first UE, or the network device only determines the second power of the second UE. Control parameters.
  • the network device sends information 1 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives information 1 from the network device.
  • Information 1 is used to indicate the first power control parameter.
  • Information 1 can also be called first information.
  • the network device sends information 2 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives information 2 from the network device.
  • Information 2 is used to indicate the second power control parameter.
  • Information 2 can also be called the fourth information.
  • the execution order of S505 and S506 can be arbitrary, for example, S506 and S507 are executed at the same time; or S506 is executed first, and then S507 is executed; or S507 is executed first, and then S506 is executed.
  • the first UE and the second UE may be pre-configured with power for transmitting the uplink reference signal.
  • the network device determines the first power control parameter and the second power control parameter, and there is no need to perform S501- S507, namely S501-S507, are optional steps.
  • the network device sends information 3.
  • the first UE and the second UE receive information 3 from the network device.
  • Information 3 is used to indicate the first resource.
  • Information 3 can also be called fifth information.
  • S508 includes S508a and S508b, where S508a is the network device sending the information 3 to the first UE.
  • S508a is the network device sending the information 3 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives Information 3 from the network device; wherein, S508b is the network device sending information 3 to the second UE, and accordingly, the second UE receives the information 3 from the network device.
  • the first UE sends the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 from the first UE.
  • the uplink reference signal sequence S5 in the embodiment of the present application is an example of the above-mentioned first uplink signal U1.
  • the first UE sends the first uplink signal sequence S5 on resource 1.
  • one uplink reference signal sequence can be regarded as one or more uplink reference signals, and one or more uplink reference signals in one uplink reference signal sequence can occupy the same time domain resource and occupy different frequency domain resources.
  • resource 1 may include multiple REs, where each RE corresponds to an index value, and the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 may occupy at least one RE among the multiple REs in the frequency domain.
  • the phase of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on each RE may be based on the first hopping method of hopping the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on the first preset phase of each RE. owned. It can be further understood that according to the first hopping method, the phases of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on different REs are jumped. In other words, the phase hopping mode of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on any two REs is the first hopping mode.
  • the hopping method can be understood as defining the hopping rule of the first preset phase of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on each RE. Specifically, for example, the hopping method is when the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 is on each RE. A phase is added to the first preset phase of the RE, or a phase is subtracted from the first preset phase.
  • the first hopping mode may be configured by the network device for the first UE, or configured in the first UE by a protocol.
  • the phase of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on different REs is jumped, so that the phase of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 sent by the first UE on different REs exhibits a certain variability. In this way, the phase of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 received by the network device on different REs also exhibits certain variability.
  • the first preset phases of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the phases of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 sent by the first UE on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the first UE when the first UE receives information 1 from the network device, the first UE may determine the power to send the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 according to the first power control parameter indicated by the information 1. And transmit the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 according to the determined power for transmitting the first uplink reference signal sequence S5.
  • the first power control parameter indicates the first expected power
  • the first UE may determine the first expected power according to the first expected power. Determine the power for transmitting the first uplink reference signal sequence S5.
  • the first expected power refers to the case where the network device expects the first UE to send the power of the first uplink signal, and the first UE may directly determine the first expected power as the power to send the first uplink reference signal sequence S5.
  • the first UE may use the first expected power and the fading value (including large-scale fading value and/or or small-scale fading value), determine the power for transmitting the first uplink reference signal sequence S5.
  • the power for transmitting the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 is the sum of the first expected power and the fading value.
  • the large-scale fading value refers to the power of signal loss caused by obstacles
  • the small-scale fading value refers to the power of signal loss caused by relative movement between the network device and the first UE.
  • the first power control parameter indicates the first power difference
  • the first UE may determine to send the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 based on the power of the last time it sent the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 and the first power difference. of power.
  • the first UE may select one of the desired power and the power difference to determine the power of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5.
  • the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 from the second UE.
  • the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 in the embodiment of the present application is an example of the second uplink signal U2 sent by the second UE.
  • the time domain resources and frequency domain resources occupied by the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 and the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 by the second UE may be the same.
  • the first UE sends the first uplink reference signal sequence S6 to the network device on resource 1
  • the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 to the network device on resource 1.
  • Resource 1 can be regarded as an example of the first resource in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the phase of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 sent by the second UE on each RE may be the second predetermined phase of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on each RE according to the second hopping mode. It is obtained by assuming that the phase jumps. It can be further understood that according to the second hopping method, the phases of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on different REs are jumped. In other words, the phase hopping mode of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on any two REs is the second hopping mode. The first hopping mode and the second hopping mode may be different.
  • the second preset phases of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the phases of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 sent by the second UE on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the second UE may determine the power with which the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 according to the second power control parameter indicated by the information 2.
  • the method for the second UE to determine the power to send the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 based on the second power control parameter may refer to the previous content of the first UE determining the power to send the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 based on the first power control parameter. No longer listed here.
  • the first UE sends the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on resource 1
  • the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on resource 1, occupying the same time domain resources and frequency domain resources
  • the first uplink reference signal The sequence S5 and the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 may be superimposed on resource 1.
  • the superposition result is called the fifth reference signal sequence in this embodiment of the application.
  • the fifth reference signal sequence is an example of the aforementioned third uplink signal U3.
  • the first UE sends the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 from the first UE.
  • the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 in the embodiment of this application is This is an example of the first uplink signal U1 sent by the first UE.
  • the first UE sends the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 to the network device on resource 2.
  • resource 2 may include multiple REs, where each RE corresponds to an index value, and the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 may occupy at least one RE among the multiple REs.
  • the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 and the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 occupy different resources, and the resources are used to indicate one or more of time domain resources, frequency domain resources and code domain resources.
  • the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 occupies part or all of the resources corresponding to the g-th time slot or the g-th frame.
  • the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 occupies part or all of the resources corresponding to the s-th time slot or the s-th frame.
  • the resources corresponding to a certain time slot occupied by a certain signal sequence may include the time domain resources on the time slot occupied by the signal sequence, and the frequency domain resources corresponding to the time domain resources on the time slot occupied by the signal sequence. , and one or more of the code domain resources corresponding to the time domain resources on the time slot occupied by the signal sequence.
  • the resources corresponding to a certain frame occupied by a certain signal sequence may include the time domain resources on the frame occupied by the signal sequence, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the time domain resources on the frame occupied by the signal sequence, and One or more of the code domain resources corresponding to the time domain resources on the frame occupied by the signal sequence.
  • g and s can be the same or different.
  • the resources occupied by the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 are at the relative position corresponding to the g-th time slot or the g-th frame
  • the resources occupied by the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 are at the s-th time slot or the s-th frame.
  • the corresponding relative positions can be the same or different.
  • the relative position is, for example, an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) index, a comb index or a cyclic shift (CS) index.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • CS cyclic shift
  • the phase of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on each RE may be the third preset phase of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on each RE according to the first hopping method. Obtained by jumping. It can be further understood that according to the first hopping method, the phases of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on different REs are jumped. In other words, the phase hopping mode of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on any two REs is the first hopping mode. The meaning of the first transition mode can be referred to the previous article.
  • the third preset phases of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the phases of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on any two REs (equivalent to the phase after the transition) may be the same or different.
  • the phase difference between the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 and the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on the RE with the same index value is not 2n ⁇ , and n is an integer. Furthermore, the phase difference between the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on the RE of the first index value and the second index value and the phase difference of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on the RE of the first index value and the second index value are The difference between is 2m ⁇ , m is an integer.
  • the phase difference of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 on RE1 and the phase difference of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on RE1 are not 0, -2 ⁇ , 2 ⁇ , etc.; the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 is on RE1 and RE2.
  • the difference between the phase difference and the phase difference of the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 on RE1 and RE2 is 0.
  • RE1 represents the RE with index value 1
  • RE2 represents the RE with index value 2.
  • the first UE may also only send the first uplink reference signal sequence S6, that is, there is no need to perform step S511, that is, step S511 is optional.
  • the second UE sends the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 from the second UE.
  • the fourth row reference signal sequence S8 in the embodiment of the present application is an example of the second uplink signal U2 sent by the second UE.
  • the resources occupied by the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 are different, and the resources are used to indicate one or more of time domain resources, frequency domain resources and code domain resources.
  • the resources occupied by the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 may be the same, and the resources are used to indicate one or more of time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and code domain resources. kind.
  • the first UE sends the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 to the network device on resource 2
  • the second UE sends the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 to the network device on resource 2.
  • Resource 2 can be regarded as an example of the first resource in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the phase of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 sent by the second UE on each resource element may be the phase of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on each resource element according to the second hopping method. It is obtained by jumping through four preset phases. It can be further understood that according to the second hopping method, the phases of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on different REs are jumped. In other words, the phase hopping mode of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on any two REs is the second hopping mode. The meaning of the second transition mode can be referred to the above.
  • the fourth preset phase of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the phases of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on any two REs may be the same or different.
  • the phase difference between the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on the resource element with the same index value is not 2n ⁇ . Furthermore, the phase difference between the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on the resource elements of the first index value and the second index value and the phase of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on the resource elements of the first index value and the second index value are The difference between the differences is 2m ⁇ . Wherein, n and m are both integers, and the values of n and m are, for example, 0, -1, 1, and 2.
  • the difference between the phase of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on RE1 and the phase of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on RE1 is ⁇ .
  • the difference between the phase difference of the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 on RE1 and RE2 and the phase difference of the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 on RE1 and RE2 is 2 ⁇ .
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram in which the first UE and the second UE respectively send uplink reference signal sequences.
  • the phases of the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 sent by the first UE in the first cycle on RE1 and RE2 are ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 respectively; the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal sequence S5 in the first cycle.
  • the phases of the reference sequence S6 on RE1 and RE2 are ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 respectively; the first UE sends the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 in the second cycle, and the phases on RE1 and RE2 are ⁇ 5 and ⁇ 6 respectively; the second UE sends In the second cycle, the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8 is sent with phases on RE1 and RE2 being ⁇ 7 and ⁇ 8 respectively.
  • the difference between ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 5 is not 2n ⁇
  • the difference between ⁇ 2 and ⁇ 6 is not 2n ⁇
  • the difference between ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 7 is not 2n ⁇
  • the difference between ⁇ 4 and ⁇ 8 is not 2n ⁇ .
  • the phase difference between ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 is equal to the phase difference between ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4; the phase difference between ⁇ 5 and ⁇ 6 is equal to the phase difference between ⁇ 7 and ⁇ 8.
  • the sixth reference signal sequence is an example of the aforementioned third uplink signal U3.
  • the second UE may also only send the second uplink reference signal sequence S6, that is, there is no need to perform step S512, that is, S512 is an optional step.
  • the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device may be based on the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 and the second uplink reference signal sequence S6, or the network device may be based on the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8, or based on
  • the first uplink channel matrix is determined based on the first uplink reference signal sequence S5, the second uplink reference signal sequence S6, the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8, and then the downlink channel matrix is determined based on the first uplink channel matrix. precoding matrix.
  • the network device may determine the first uplink channel matrix according to the fifth reference signal sequence and/or the sixth reference signal sequence, and determine the downlink precoding matrix according to the first uplink channel matrix. For example, the network device performs singular value or eigenvalue decomposition on the first uplink channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix. For another example, the network device performs singular value or eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrix of the first uplink channel matrix to obtain the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the covariance matrix of the first uplink channel matrix can be based on the phase of the transpose matrix of the first uplink channel matrix and the uplink reference signal sequence. definite.
  • the phases of the uplink signal sequences (such as the first uplink reference signal sequence S5, the second uplink reference signal sequence S6, the third uplink reference signal sequence S7 and the fourth uplink reference signal sequence S8) in the embodiment of the present application present a certain variability, therefore the covariance matrix of the first uplink channel matrix determined by the network device using the uplink signal sequence also exhibits certain variability, making the determined covariance matrix of the first uplink signal more error-tolerant, which is conducive to improving Determine the accuracy of the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device sends the first data to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • the meaning of the first data, the manner in which the network device sends the first data to the first UE, and the content of the first UE processing the first data may refer to the content discussed above and will not be listed here.
  • the network device sends the first data to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • the meaning of the first data, the manner in which the network device sends the first data to the second UE, and the content of the second UE processing the first data may refer to the content discussed above and will not be listed here.
  • S516 The first UE sends third response information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the third response information from the first UE.
  • the third response information is used to indicate whether one UE (such as the second UE) among the plurality of UEs has successfully received the first data.
  • Successfully receiving the first data by the second UE may be understood to mean that the UE receives the first data and successfully decodes the first data.
  • the second UE's failure to successfully receive the first data may be understood as the UE's failure to successfully decode the first data.
  • the third response information is specifically used to indicate NACK or ACK.
  • the third response information may occupy 1 bit, and the value of this 1 bit is 1, indicating NACK; the value of this 1 bit is 0, indicating ACK.
  • the third response information is used to indicate whether both the first UE and the second UE successfully receive the first data.
  • the first response information is specifically used to indicate a negative response or a positive response in HARQ, where NACK is used to indicate that at least one of the second UE and the first UE has not successfully received the first data.
  • ACK is used to indicate that both the second UE and the first UE successfully receive the first data.
  • the network device may designate one of the first UE and the second UE to send the third response information.
  • the network device designates the first UE to send the third response information as an example.
  • the first UE may receive the second indication information from the network device and determine that the first UE needs to send the third response information to the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the first UE to send the third response information.
  • the first UE and the second UE may negotiate to determine that one of the UEs sends the third response information.
  • the first UE sends the third response information as an example.
  • the way the first UE determines the third response information is also different, as follows: The following are explained separately.
  • the third response information is used to indicate whether one UE (such as the second UE) among the plurality of UEs has successfully received the first data.
  • the third response information indicates whether the second UE has successfully received the first data as an example.
  • the second UE is a UE among the plurality of UEs whose channel quality is less than or equal to the first threshold, or the second UE is a UE among the plurality of UEs whose channel quality is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the channel quality may specifically be uplink channel quality or downlink channel quality.
  • the content of the uplink channel quality may refer to the content of the uplink channel quality
  • the determination method of the downlink channel quality may refer to the determination method of the uplink channel quality.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information is also used to indicate that a UE among multiple UEs whose channel quality (such as uplink channel quality or downlink channel quality) is less than or equal to the first threshold is the second UE.
  • the first UE can determine which UE's response information should be specifically fed back.
  • other UEs among the plurality of UEs may feed back their channel quality (such as uplink channel quality or downlink channel quality) to the first UE, so that the first UE may determine from the plurality of UEs that the uplink channel quality is less than or equal to the first UE.
  • threshold UE that is, the second UE, and determine to feed back the response information corresponding to the second UE.
  • the network device sends the third indication information to the second UE, and accordingly, the second UE receives the third indication information from the network device.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the channel quality of the second UE is less than or equal to the first threshold, and then the second UE can send the response information of the second UE to the first UE.
  • the response information of the second UE is called fourth response information here.
  • the network device may determine that the multiple UEs have successfully received the first data.
  • the network device may resend the first data to the second UE independently. In this case, the network device may use unicast mode to send the first data to the second UE. The UE resends the first data.
  • the network device can resend the first data to all of the multiple UEs. In this case, the network device can use unicast or Resend the first data in multicast mode.
  • the first UE only needs to feed back the response information corresponding to one UE, and does not need to feed back the response information corresponding to each UE in multiple UEs, which is beneficial to reducing the space occupied by the first response information fed back by the first UE.
  • the number of bits reduces the amount of data interaction between the first UE and the network device.
  • the third response information is used to indicate whether both the first UE and the second UE successfully receive the first data.
  • the first UE may determine whether the first UE successfully receives the first data and generate response information of the first UE.
  • the response information of the first UE is referred to as fifth response information here.
  • the first UE may obtain the response information of the second UE from the second UE (the response information of the second UE may be referred to as fourth response information).
  • the first UE may send the fourth response information and the fifth response information as third response information to the network device.
  • the third response information includes fourth response information and fifth response information.
  • the network device may determine whether both the first UE and the second UE successfully receive the first data. If one or both of the first UE and the second UE do not successfully receive the first data, the network device may resend the first data to the UE that did not successfully receive the first data.
  • the first UE may perform a logical sum operation on the fourth response information and the fifth response information, generate third response information, and send the third response information to the network device.
  • the third response information may only occupy One bit. For example, if the value of the fourth response information is 1 and the value of the fifth response information is 1, then the first UE determines that the value of the third response information is 1.
  • the network device resends the first data to the multiple UEs.
  • the network device may use unicast or multicast. method to resend the first data.
  • the first UE feeds back the third response information.
  • multiple UEs can also feed back their own response information to the network device respectively.
  • the first UE feeds back the third response information to the network device.
  • Send fifth response information, and the second UE sends fourth response information to the network device.
  • S513 is an optional step.
  • multiple UEs can send uplink reference signals to the network device on the same resource, and the network device can determine a downlink precoding matrix based on the uplink reference signals from multiple UEs. In this way, the network device does not need to separately determine the downlink precoding matrix for each UE, which simplifies the calculation process and calculation overhead of the network device to calculate the downlink precoding matrix. Moreover, multiple UEs share a downlink precoding matrix, which is beneficial to saving the overhead of the downlink precoding matrix. Moreover, the network device can also flexibly determine the power of multiple UEs to send uplink reference signal sequences according to the uplink channel conditions of multiple UEs to ensure that multiple UEs can successfully send uplink reference signal sequences.
  • the phase of the uplink reference signal sequence can be jumped, so that the phases of the uplink reference signal sequences of any two UEs among the multiple UEs received by the network device are The difference is variable, which helps the network device determine a more fault-tolerant downlink precoding matrix and improves the accuracy of the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device uses the downlink precoding matrix to send the first data to multiple UEs, one of the multiple UEs can report a response information to the network device, instead of each of the multiple UEs having to report to the network. The device reports response information, which is helpful to reduce the number of interactions between the network device and the UE.
  • Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method.
  • the first uplink signal U1 and the second uplink signal U2 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 are analog signals in the second possible implementation manner.
  • the first UE sends the first uplink reference signal S1 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first uplink reference signal S1 from the first UE.
  • the first uplink reference signal S1 is, for example, SRS.
  • the second UE sends the second uplink reference signal S2 to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second uplink reference signal S2 from the second UE.
  • the second uplink reference signal S2 is, for example, SRS.
  • S703 The network device determines M locations.
  • the M positions are the same M positions in the first matrix corresponding to the first UE and the first matrix corresponding to the second UE.
  • the network device may determine the second matrix of the first UE based on the first uplink reference signal S1, and determine the second matrix of the second UE based on the second uplink reference signal S2.
  • the network device may be based on the position of the non-zero element in the second matrix of the first UE (in order to simplify the description, in the embodiment of this application, the position of the non-zero element in the second matrix of the first UE is called the first position set) , and the positions of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of the second UE (in order to simplify the description, in the embodiment of this application, the positions of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of the second UE are called the second position set), determine The M locations.
  • both the first UE and the second UE correspond to P spatial layers.
  • the first UE may correspond to P second matrices
  • the second UE may correspond to P second matrices.
  • one of the P second matrices corresponding to the first UE The second matrices correspond to one of the P spatial layers corresponding to the first UE.
  • One of the P second matrices corresponding to the second UE corresponds to one of the P spatial layers corresponding to the second UE.
  • the network device may determine the uplink channel matrix of the first UE according to the first uplink reference signal S1.
  • the network device determines the precoding matrix of the first UE based on the uplink channel matrix of the first UE, and then determines the second matrix of the first UE based on the precoding matrix of the first UE, thus determining the second matrix of the first UE.
  • the position of the non-zero elements in is equivalent to determining the first position set.
  • the network device performs eigenvalue decomposition or SVD on the uplink channel matrix of the first UE, or performs eigenvalue or SVD on the covariance matrix of the uplink channel matrix of the first UE, thereby obtaining the second matrix of the first UE.
  • the network device can also determine the position of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of the second UE based on the uplink reference signal S2, which is equivalent to determining the second position set.
  • the network device may determine the union of the first location set and the second location set as the M locations.
  • the network device may determine the intersection of the first location set and the second location set as the M locations.
  • the first location set may be the locations of the non-zero elements of the second matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers
  • the second location set may be the locations of the second UE on the P spatial layers.
  • the network device is equivalent to based on the position of the non-zero element in the second matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers, and the position of the second UE on the Kth spatial layer of the P spatial layers.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the second matrix on K spatial layers are determined.
  • K is a positive integer less than or equal to P
  • P is a positive integer.
  • the M positions determined in this case can be understood as corresponding to the first matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers, and to the Kth matrix of the second UE on the P spatial layers.
  • the positions of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of the first UE on any two of the P spatial layers are the same, and the second UE is on any two of the P spatial layers.
  • the position of the non-zero element in the second matrix may be the positions of non-zero elements in the P second matrices corresponding to the first UE, and the second position set may be understood as the non-zero elements in the P second matrices corresponding to the first UE.
  • the position of the element Among them, a second matrix corresponds to a spatial layer.
  • the M positions are equivalent to the positions of the non-zero elements of the first UE in the second matrix on the P spatial layers, and the non-zero elements of the second UE in the second matrix on the P spatial layers.
  • the position of the element is determined.
  • the M positions determined in this case can be understood as P first matrix correspondences corresponding to the first UE, and P first matrix correspondences corresponding to the second UE.
  • the first position set is the position of the non-zero elements in the second matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers
  • the second position set is the position of the second UE in the P spatial layers.
  • the positions of non-zero elements in the second matrix on the Kth spatial layer, the first position set includes (1,1), (1,2) and (3,1).
  • (1, 1) represents the 1st row and the 1st item in the second matrix of the first UE
  • (1, 2) represents the 1st row and the 2nd item in the second matrix of the first UE
  • (3, 1 ) represents the first row of the third row in the second matrix of the first UE.
  • the second position set includes (1,2), (1,3) and (3,1).
  • (1, 2) represents the 1st row and 2nd item in the second matrix of the second UE
  • (1, 3) represents the position of an element as the 1st row and 3rd item in the second matrix of the second UE.
  • (3, 1) represents the first row of the third row in the second matrix of the second UE.
  • the network device may determine the intersection of the first location set and the second location set as M locations (that is, the M locations include (1, 2) and (3, 1)). Alternatively, the union of the first location set and the second location set of the network device is determined as M locations (that is, the M locations include (1,1), (1,2), (1,3) and (3,1) ).
  • the first UE includes R antennas (or antenna ports), and the first UE also corresponds to the R-th Two matrices.
  • the second UE includes T antennas (or antenna ports), and the second UE also corresponds to T second matrices.
  • the values of T and R can refer to the previous article.
  • the network device may determine the uplink channel matrix of the first UE according to the first uplink reference signal S1.
  • the network device determines at least one frequency domain vector corresponding to the uplink channel matrix according to the uplink channel matrix of the first UE, and determines at least one spatial domain vector corresponding to the uplink channel matrix, so that the network device determines at least one frequency domain vector according to the at least one frequency domain vector (the at least one The frequency domain vectors constitute a frequency domain matrix) and at least one spatial domain vector (the at least one spatial domain vector constitutes a spatial domain matrix) determines a space-frequency combining coefficient matrix on an antenna (or antenna port), which is called the second matrix.
  • the network device may determine the second matrix of the second UE on one antenna (or antenna port).
  • the M positions may be the positions of non-zero elements of the second matrix according to the first UE on one antenna (or antenna port), and the second UE on one antenna (or antenna port). The position of the non-zero elements of the matrix is determined.
  • the M positions are the positions of non-zero elements of the second matrix of the first UE on one antenna (or antenna port), and the positions of non-zero elements of the second matrix of the second UE on one antenna (or antenna port). The intersection or union of the positions of zero elements.
  • S701-S703 is a way for the network device to determine the M locations. In fact, there are many ways for the network device to determine the M locations. This embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate M locations.
  • the first indication information may indicate M locations implicitly or explicitly indicate M locations.
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the meaning of the first indication information may refer to the content discussed above.
  • S701-S705 is a way for the first UE and the second UE to obtain M positions. In fact, there are many ways for the first UE and the second UE to obtain M positions. When the first UE and the second UE When the second UE obtains M positions by other methods, it is not necessary to perform S701-S705, that is, S701-S705 are optional steps.
  • the network device sends the first downlink reference signal S3 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first downlink reference signal S3 from the network device.
  • the first downlink reference signal S3 is, for example, CSI-RS.
  • the network device sends the second downlink reference signal S4 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the second downlink reference signal S4 from the network device.
  • the second downlink reference signal S4 is, for example, CSI-RS.
  • the network device sends information 3.
  • multiple UEs receive information 3.
  • Information 3 is used to indicate the first resource.
  • Information 3 can also be called fifth information.
  • the contents of information 3 and the first resource can be referred to the above.
  • the network device can send information 3 to multiple UEs in a multicast or unicast manner.
  • S708 may include S708a and S708b, where S708a is for the network device to send information 3 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the information from the network device.
  • S708b is for the network device to send information 3 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives information 3 from the network device.
  • the first UE sends the first analog signal A1 to the network device on the first resource.
  • the network device receives the first analog signal A1 from the first UE on the first resource.
  • the first analog signal A1 in the embodiment of this application is an example of the first uplink signal U1 sent by the first UE.
  • the first analog signal A1 is used to indicate M elements in the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the M elements are the M elements at the M positions in the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the first UE determines the first matrix of the first UE according to the first downlink reference signal S3, wherein the method for the first UE to determine the first matrix of the first UE may refer to the previous network device determining according to the uplink reference signal.
  • First UE The contents of the second matrix are not listed here.
  • the first UE Before the first UE sends the first analog signal A1 to the network device, the first UE may obtain M locations. The following is an introduction to how the first UE determines the M locations.
  • the first UE may receive the first indication information from the network device, which is equivalent to the first UE obtaining M positions.
  • Method 2 The first UE can determine M locations by itself.
  • the first UE determines the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the first UE is called the third Location collection.
  • the first UE may receive the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE from the second UE.
  • the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE is called Fourth position collection.
  • the first UE determines M locations according to the third location set and the fourth location set.
  • the manner in which the second UE determines the first matrix of the second UE may refer to the previous content of the network device determining the second matrix of the first UE based on the uplink reference signal, which will not be listed here.
  • the network device may determine the union of the third location set and the fourth location set as M locations.
  • the network device may determine the intersection of the third location set and the fourth location set as M locations.
  • the first UE corresponds to P first matrices, wherein one first matrix of the first UE corresponds to one of the P spatial layers, and the corresponding first matrix of the second UE corresponds to P first matrices, wherein a first matrix of the second UE corresponds to one of the P spatial layers.
  • the third position set may be the positions of the first UE in the first matrix of the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers.
  • the fourth position set may be the positions of the second UE in the first matrix.
  • the first UE may respectively determine P groups of M positions, wherein the group of M positions is based on the non-zero elements of the first matrix of one of the P spatial layers of the first UE, and the th The two UEs are determined by the non-zero elements in the first matrix of one spatial layer among the P spatial layers.
  • the positions of non-zero elements in any two of the P first matrices of the first UE are the same, and any two of the P first matrices of the second UE have the same position.
  • the third position set may be the positions of the non-zero elements in the P first matrices of the first UE
  • the fourth position set may be the P first matrices of the second UE. non-zero elements in .
  • the network device may determine an M positions, which are based on the positions of the first UE in the first matrix of the P spatial layers and the positions of the second UE in the P spatial layers. The position of the non-zero element in the first matrix is determined.
  • the third location set may be the locations of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE on one antenna (or antenna port).
  • the fourth location set may be the locations of the second UE on one antenna.
  • the network device may determine the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the first UE on one antenna (or antenna port), and the position of the first matrix of the second UE on one antenna (or antenna port). The positions of the non-zero elements in determine the M positions.
  • the first UE may be preconfigured with M locations.
  • the first UE may be configured with M locations by the protocol.
  • the first UE may also send first indication information to the second UE, where the first indication information is used to indicate the M locations.
  • the second UE may also determine M locations, and the way in which the second UE determines the M locations may refer to the way in which the first UE determines the M locations.
  • the second UE may send first indication information to the first UE to indicate M locations, which is equivalent to the first UE obtaining M locations.
  • the second UE sends the second analog signal A2 to the network device on the first resource.
  • the network device receives the second analog signal A2 from the second UE on the first resource.
  • the second analog signal A2 in the embodiment of the present application is an example of the second uplink signal U2 sent by the second UE.
  • the second analog signal A2 is used to indicate M elements in the first matrix of the second UE.
  • the M elements are the M elements corresponding to the M positions in the first matrix of the second UE.
  • the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 are both sent on the first resource, so the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 can be superimposed on the first resource.
  • the superposition result of the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 at the first resource is called a third analog signal A3, where the third analog signal A3 includes a third superposition result, a fourth superposition result and a fifth One or more of the overlay results.
  • the third superposition result is the superposition result of the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 in the frequency domain or time domain.
  • the second superposition result is the superposition result of the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 in the antenna domain or beam.
  • the third superposition result is the superposition result of the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 in the code domain.
  • the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 can be expressed as complex numbers in the frequency domain, time domain, antenna domain, beam domain or code domain respectively.
  • the third analog signal A3 can be seen is the sum of two complex numbers.
  • the third analog signal A3 is equivalent to an example of the aforementioned third uplink signal U3. In this case, it is equivalent to the network device receiving the third analog signal A3.
  • the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 can be respectively expressed in a complex form (for example, a complex vector or a complex matrix) in the frequency domain, time domain, antenna domain, beam domain or code domain.
  • the third analog signal A3 can be regarded as the sum of two complex numbers. If the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 are complex vectors, then the third analog signal A3 corresponds to a complex vector. If the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2 are complex matrices, then the third analog signal A3 corresponds to a complex matrix.
  • the first UE sends first indication information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the first indication information from the first UE.
  • the first UE may perform S711.
  • S711 when S701-S704 are executed, S711 does not need to be executed, that is, S711 is an optional step. Or, in the case of executing S711, there is no need to execute the steps of S701-S704.
  • the first UE may also send the sixth information to the network device, and/or the second UE may send the seventh information to the network device.
  • the sixth information and the seventh information may be digital signals.
  • the sixth information is used to indicate the fifth position set and the elements on the fifth position set.
  • the seventh information is used to indicate the sixth position set and the elements on the sixth position set.
  • the fifth position set refers to the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE other than the M positions
  • the sixth position set refers to the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the second UE. Positions other than the M positions.
  • the first UE and the second UE both correspond to P spatial layers
  • the first analog signal A1 indicates the M elements of the first matrix on the Kth spatial layer of the P spatial layers for the first UE.
  • the fifth location set may specifically be the Kth spatial layer of the first UE. Bits other than M positions of non-zero elements in the first matrix Set.
  • the sixth position set may specifically be positions other than M positions among the positions of non-zero elements in the first matrix on the Kth spatial layer of the second UE.
  • the first UE corresponds to R antennas (or antenna ports)
  • the second UE corresponds to T antennas (or antenna ports)
  • the first analog signal A1 indicates that the first UE has R antennas (or antenna ports).
  • the second analog signal A2 indicates that the second UE has the M elements of the first matrix of one of the R antennas (or antenna ports).
  • the fifth position set may be specifically the position of the first UE in the non-zero elements of the first matrix of one antenna (or antenna port) among the R antennas (or antenna ports). Positions other than M positions.
  • the sixth position set may be specifically the positions of the second UE other than M positions among the positions of the non-zero elements of the first matrix of one antenna (or antenna port) among the T antennas (or antenna ports).
  • the network device determines the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device may determine the downlink precoding matrix according to the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A2.
  • the method of determining the downlink precoding matrix may refer to the content of determining the downlink precoding matrix discussed previously in FIG. 2 .
  • the network device may according to the first analog signal A1 and the second analog signal A1.
  • Signal A2 as well as sixth information and/or seventh information, determine the third matrix.
  • the elements at M positions in the third matrix are respectively M summation results, and the elements at each position at the fifth position set in the third matrix correspond to the elements indicated by the sixth information.
  • the element at each position on the sixth position set in the third matrix corresponds to the element indicated by the seventh information.
  • the network device can obtain a third matrix with more comprehensive information, which is also helpful for the network device to determine a downlink precoding matrix with higher accuracy.
  • the network device sends the first data to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • the manner in which the network device sends the first data to the first UE and the content of the first data may refer to the content discussed above in Figure 2 and will not be listed here.
  • the network device sends the first data to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • the method for the network device to send the first data to the second UE may refer to the content discussed in Figure 2 above, which will not be listed here.
  • the first UE sends third response information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the third response information from the first UE.
  • the determination method of the first UE, the meaning of the third response information, the method of the first UE determining the third response information, and the method of the network device retransmitting the first data after receiving the third response information can all be discussed with reference to Figure 5 above. The content is not listed here.
  • S715 is an optional step.
  • the network device can determine a downlink precoding matrix shared by multiple UEs based on the analog signals sent by multiple UEs, because multiple UEs do not need to perform M positions in the first matrix. Quantizing the elements not only reduces the processing volume of multiple UEs, but also reduces the information quantification loss caused by the process of quantizing the elements at M positions in the first matrix of multiple UEs. This is conducive to the network equipment to determine more accurate downlink precoding matrix. Moreover, the downlink precoding matrix determined by the network device is shared by multiple UEs, which is beneficial to reducing the overhead of the downlink precoding matrix.
  • the network device does not have to determine the downlink precoding matrix for each UE among multiple UEs, so it can be simply It simplifies the process of determining the downlink precoding matrix by network equipment, and can reduce the computing overhead of network equipment.
  • multiple UEs all send analog signals on the first resource, which is beneficial to reducing resource overhead for multiple UEs sending analog signals, and facilitates network equipment to receive analog signals from these multiple UEs.
  • multiple UEs only need to report some elements in their respective first matrices instead of each reporting the first matrix. Therefore, the amount of data reported by multiple UEs can be reduced, which also reduces the resources required for reporting by multiple UEs. overhead.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method.
  • one terminal device (such as a first terminal device) among multiple terminal devices can determine the number of terminal devices among multiple terminal devices.
  • the first matrix determines the precoding matrix indication based on the M summing results.
  • the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrix according to the precoding matrix indication, which simplifies the network device's calculation of the downlink precoding matrix for multiple terminal devices. The process of encoding the matrix and reducing the computational overhead of network devices.
  • multiple terminal devices share a downlink precoding matrix, which reduces resource overhead of precoding matrices for multiple terminal devices.
  • multiple terminal devices only need one terminal device to report one precoding matrix indication, instead of multiple terminal devices reporting their own precoding matrices respectively, which reduces the overhead of multiple terminal devices reporting precoding matrices.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flow chart of this method.
  • the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 can be applied to the scenario shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the multiple UEs in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 include a first UE and a second UE.
  • the first UE and the second UE are, for example, any terminal device 110 shown in FIG. 1 , and the UE in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8
  • the group is also introduced by taking the example of including the first UE and the second UE.
  • the network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 is, for example, the network device 120 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the network device sends a downlink reference signal.
  • a downlink reference signal is, for example, CSI-RS.
  • the network device may send the downlink reference signal to the first UE and the second UE respectively in a unicast manner.
  • S801 may include S801a and S801b, where S801a is the network device sending the first downlink reference signal S1 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the first downlink reference signal from the network device.
  • S1; S801b means that the network device sends the second downlink reference signal S2 to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the second downlink reference signal S2 from the network device.
  • the network device may send the downlink reference signal to the UE group (in the embodiment of this application, the UE group includes the first UE and the second UE as an example) in a multicast manner, and the content of the downlink reference signal is sent in the multicast manner. Please refer to the content discussed above and will not list it here.
  • S802 The second UE sends information 4 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives information 4 from the second UE.
  • Information 4 is used to indicate the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE and the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE.
  • Information 4 can also be called second information.
  • the second UE may determine the first matrix of the second UE according to the second downlink reference signal S2.
  • the method for the second UE to determine the first matrix may refer to the content discussed above in FIG. 7 , which will not be listed here.
  • the second UE may determine the non-zero elements in the first matrix and the positions of the non-zero elements, and send information 4 to the first UE.
  • the first UE may determine the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the first UE may determine M positions according to the positions of non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE and the positions of non-zero elements in the first matrix of the second UE. For example, the first UE determines the union of the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE and the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the second UE as M positions; or, the first UE The intersection of the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE and the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the second UE is determined as M positions. Correspondingly, the first UE also obtains the first moment in the second UE. M elements at the M positions in the matrix, and M elements at the M positions in the first matrix of the first UE.
  • the first UE can use the P spatial layers according to the first UE.
  • the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix on the K-th spatial layer among the spatial layers, and the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE on the K-th spatial layer among the P spatial layers Determine the M locations.
  • the M positions are, for example, the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers, and the Kth position of the second UE on the P spatial layers.
  • the first UE includes R antennas (or antenna ports), and the first UE corresponds to R first matrices, and the second UE includes T antennas (or antenna ports), and the second UE also corresponds to
  • T and R can refer to the content discussed above.
  • the first UE may be based on the position of the non-zero elements in the first matrix on one antenna (or antenna port) of the first UE, and the position of the non-zero elements in the first matrix on one antenna (or antenna port) of the second UE. The position of the element determines the M positions.
  • the M positions are, for example, the positions of the non-zero elements in the first matrix of the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers, and the Kth position of the second UE on the P spatial layers.
  • the second UE sends information 5 to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives information 5 from the second UE.
  • Information 5 is used to indicate M elements in the first matrix of the second UE. These M elements correspond to M positions in the first matrix of the second UE.
  • the first UE and the second UE may determine M locations in advance, and the second UE may directly feed back the M elements of the second UE's first matrix to the first UE.
  • the M locations may be fed back by the first UE to the second UE, or determined by the second UE, or obtained by the first UE and the second UE from the network device.
  • the ways in which the network device determines the M locations and the first UE or the second UE determines the M locations may refer to the content discussed above.
  • S802 and S803 are two ways for the first UE to determine M elements of multiple UEs. When S802 is executed, S803 does not need to be executed; or, when S803 is executed, S802 does not need to be executed. .
  • M summation results may be determined.
  • the meaning of the M summation results and the method of determining the M summation results can be referred to the content discussed above.
  • the A UE can determine M summation results corresponding to each spatial layer in the P spaces in the above manner.
  • the meaning of the M positions corresponding to the P first matrices of the first UE and the P second matrices of the second UE may refer to the content discussed above.
  • the first UE sends a precoding matrix indication to the network device.
  • the network device receives the precoding matrix indication from the first UE.
  • the first UE may directly determine the precoding matrix indication based on the M summation results.
  • the first UE may determine the third matrix based on M summation results. Furthermore, the first UE may determine the precoding matrix indication according to the third matrix, and send the precoding matrix indication to the network device. For example, the first UE may quantize the third matrix to obtain the precoding matrix indication.
  • the first UE may be configured according to the first UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers.
  • the position of the non-zero element in the matrix and the position of the non-zero element in the first matrix of the second UE on the Kth spatial layer among the P spatial layers determine the M positions
  • the first UE The third matrix determined based on the M summation results can be regarded as a space-frequency combining coefficient matrix on a spatial layer.
  • the third matrix determined by the first UE according to M summation results can be regarded as A matrix of space-frequency combining coefficients on an antenna (or antenna port).
  • the network device can obtain the third matrix, and then determine the downlink precoding matrix based on the third matrix.
  • the content of the downlink precoding matrix determined by the network device according to the third matrix may refer to the content discussed in Figure 2 above.
  • S806 The network device sends the first data.
  • multiple UEs receive the first data from the network device.
  • the meaning of the first data and the manner in which the network device sends the first data may also refer to the above.
  • the network device After receiving the precoding matrix indication, the network device can determine the third matrix, determine the downlink precoding matrix based on the third matrix, and use the downlink precoding matrix to precode the data to be sent, thereby obtaining the first data.
  • the network device determines the content of the downlink precoding matrix based on the third matrix, reference may be made to the content discussed above.
  • S806 When the network device sends the first data to multiple UEs in a unicast manner, S806 includes S806a and S806b, where S806a is the network device sending the first data to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives data from the network device. The first data; S806b is for the network device to send the first data to the second UE, and accordingly, the second UE receives the first data from the network device.
  • the network device may send the first data to multiple UEs in a multicast manner.
  • the specific content of multicast please refer to the previous article and will not be listed here.
  • the first UE sends third response information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the third response information from the first UE.
  • the manner in which the first UE determines the third response information, the determination manner of the first UE, and the content of the network device retransmitting the first data after receiving the third response information please refer to the previous figure. 5 The contents discussed are not listed here.
  • one UE (such as the first UE) among multiple UEs can directly determine the downlink precoding matrix based on the M summation results, and then determine the precoding matrix indication and provide it to the network device.
  • Feedback of the precoding matrix indication allows the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the first downlink precoding indication. In this way, the network device does not need to calculate the downlink precoding matrix by itself, which reduces the calculation amount of the network device.
  • the downlink precoding matrix is shared by multiple UEs, reducing the consumption of the precoding matrix.
  • the first UE only needs to feed back the precoding matrix indication to the network device, and the network device can determine the downlink precoding matrices of multiple UEs, without each UE having to report to the network device.
  • the precoding matrix reduces the resource overhead required to report the precoding matrix.
  • multiple UEs including two UEs are used as an example for explanation.
  • the number of UEs may be 2 or more.
  • the process of executing the above communication method is similar to the process of executing the communication method previously and will not be listed here.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 900 includes a transceiver module 901 and a processing module 902.
  • the transceiver module 901 and the processing module 902 can be coupled and configured.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned network device, such as the functions of the network device in FIG. 2, FIG. 5 or FIG. 7.
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to receive uplink signals from multiple UEs in S202; the processing module 902 is configured to execute the steps of S203.
  • the transceiving module 901 is configured to receive the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 from the first UE and the second uplink reference signal sequence S6 from the second UE; the processing module 902 is configured to perform step S513.
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to receive the analog signal A1 from the first UE and the analog signal A2 from the second UE; the processing module 902 is configured to perform step S712.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned network device, such as the functions of the network device in FIG. 8 .
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to perform step S805 under the control of the processing module 902.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal equipment, such as the functions of any UE in FIG. 2 .
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to send an uplink signal to the network device in S202a under the control of the processing module 902.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal equipment, such as the functions of any UE in FIG. 5 .
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to send the first uplink reference signal sequence S5 to the network device in S509 under the control of the processing module 902.
  • the processing module 902 is also used to determine M positions. The meaning of the M positions and the specific method of determining the M positions can be referred to the above.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal equipment, such as the functions of any UE in FIG. 7 .
  • the transceiver module 901 is configured to send the analog signal A1 to the network device in S709 under the control of the processing module 902.
  • the processing module 902 is also used to determine M positions. The meaning of the M positions and the specific method of determining the M positions can be referred to the above.
  • the communication device 900 may be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal equipment, such as the functions of any UE in FIG. 8 .
  • the transceiver module 901 is used to send a precoding matrix indication to the network device; the processing module 902 is used to determine M summation results.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 includes a processor 1001 and a communication interface 1002 .
  • the processor 1001 and the communication interface 1002 are coupled to each other.
  • the communication interface 1002 may be a transceiver or an input-output interface.
  • the processor 1001 and the communication interface 1002 can implement any of the communication methods mentioned above.
  • the communication device 1000 may also include a memory 1003, which is illustrated by a dotted box in FIG. 10 .
  • the memory 1003 is used to store instructions executed by the processor 1001 and/or input data required by the processor 1001 to run the instructions and/or data generated after the processor 1001 executes the instructions.
  • the memory 1003 can also be integrated with the memory 1003 .
  • the memory 1003 and the communication interface 1002 are connected through a bus.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in Figure 10.
  • the connection methods between other components are only schematically illustrated and are not limiting.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 10, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned network device. Specifically, it can also implement the aforementioned functions. The steps to implement network equipment.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal device, and specifically can also implement the steps implemented by the aforementioned terminal device.
  • the processor 1001 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned processing module 902, and the communication interface 1002 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned transceiver module 901.
  • processor 1001 in the embodiment of the present application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), dedicated integrated processor Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • PROM programmable ROM
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • Erase programmable read-only memory electrically ePROM, EEPROM
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data eate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor 1001 is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component
  • the memory storage module
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication system.
  • the communication system includes the network equipment and terminal equipment mentioned above.
  • the terminal equipment is such as UE1 and UE2 mentioned above.
  • the communication system can also implement any of the previous communication methods.
  • the structure of the network equipment and the terminal equipment can refer to the structure of the communication device shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the structure of both the network equipment and the terminal equipment may be referred to the structure of the communication device shown in FIG. 10 .
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, which includes: a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is used to call and run instructions from the interface, and when the processor executes the instructions, any one of the above communication methods is implemented.
  • This chip system can be used to implement the functions of the previous network equipment. Alternatively, the chip system is used to implement the functions of the aforementioned terminal device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions. When executed, the computer-readable storage medium implements any of the above communication methods.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a computer, implements any of the above communication methods.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory Memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form well known in the art in the storage medium.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and storage media may be located in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can be located in the base station or terminal. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the base station or terminal.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits via wired or wireless means to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, and tapes; optical media, such as digital video optical disks; or semiconductor media, such as solid-state hard drives.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be volatile or nonvolatile storage media, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供一种通信方法及装置，涉及通信技术领域。在该通信方法中，网络设备可在第一资源上从多个终端设备接收多个第一上行信号；网络设备根据所述多个第一上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于向多个终端设备发送数据。由于下行预编码矩阵是多个终端设备共享的，如此，无需网络设备单独为每个终端设备确定下行预编码矩阵，因此简化了网络设备确定多个终端设备的下行预编码矩阵的过程。

Description

一种通信方法及装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2022年06月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210761826.4、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
基站可为终端设备配置用于发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)的资源，终端设备在配置的资源上向基站发送SRS。基站可根据接收的SRS进行信道估计，从而确定下行预编码矩阵。
当基站服务的终端设备数量较多时，基站需要分别对多个终端设备中的每个终端设备进行信道估计，进而确定多个终端设备中每个终端设备的下行预编码矩阵。由此可见，基站确定多个终端设备的下行预编码矩阵的过程较为繁琐。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置，用于简化确定多个终端设备的预编码矩阵的过程。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可由网络设备执行，或者可由芯片系统执行，该芯片系统可以实现网络设备的功能。为便于描述，下文中以网络设备执行为例。所述方法包括：在第一资源上从多个终端设备接收多个上行信号，每个所述上行信号来自所述多个终端设备中的一个；根据所述多个上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于向多个终端设备发送数据。
在本申请实施例中，多个终端设备可在第一资源上分别发送上行信号，网络设备可根据来自多个终端设备的上行信号，确定多个终端设备共享的下行预编码矩阵，无需为多个终端设备中的每个终端设备单独确定预编码矩阵，简化了确定多个终端设备的下行预编码矩阵的过程，且有利于减小网络设备的计算开销。并且，多个终端设备共享一个下行预编码矩阵，有利于节省下行预编码的开销。并且，由于多个终端设备均是在第一资源上发送第一上行信号，有利于减少多个终端设备发送上行信号所需的资源开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述多个上行信号为参考信号；或者，所述多个上行信号为模拟信号，其中，所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应一个第一矩阵，每个所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，每个所述上行信号指示M个元素，所述M个元素为发送所述上行信号的终端设备对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素，所述M个元素处于所述第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，M为正整数。
在该实施方式中提供了上行信号的两种具体实现方式，一种上行信号为参考信号，这种情况下，网络设备可根据多个终端设备的参考信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，由于多个终 端设备均在第一资源上发送上行信号，减少了多个终端设备发送参考信号的资源开销。另一种上行信号为模拟信号，且模拟信号指示了发送该模拟信号的终端设备的第一矩阵中的M个元素，终端设备不是采用数字信号向网络设备反馈第一矩阵，有利于避免终端设备量化第一矩阵所造成的量化损失。
在一种可能的实施方式中，根据所述第二上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，包括：根据所述多个上行信号，确定第一信道矩阵；对所述第一信道矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得所述下行预编码矩阵，或者，对所述第一信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得所述下行预编码矩阵。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可直接联合多个上行信号，确定多个终端设备对应的一个信道矩阵(如第一信道矩阵)，该第一信道矩阵相当于多个终端设备的信道矩阵和，进而网络设备根据该第一信道矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵，网络设备无需分别为多个终端设备确定信道矩阵以及下行预编码矩阵等，简化了确定下行预编码矩阵的过程。并且，由于网络设备联合了多个终端设备的上行信号确定下行预编码矩阵，使得确定的下行预编码矩阵能够更好地适用于多个终端设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述多个上行信号中的任意两个上行信号所指示的M个元素在所述第一矩阵中的M个位置相同。
在该实施方式中，多个终端设备上报的M个元素在多个终端设备各自的第一矩阵中的M个位置是相同的，多个终端设备可仅上报M个元素，而不必再单独上报M个位置，有利于减少终端设备上报的数据量。并且，由于多个终端设备上报的是相同位置上的M个元素，因此简化了网络设备基于多个终端设备分别对应的M个元素，确定多个终端设备共享的下行预编码矩阵的过程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，根据所述多个上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，包括：根据所述多个上行信号，确定M个求和结果，每个所述求和结果为多个元素之和，所述多个元素与所述多个上行信号一一对应，所述多个元素中的每个元素为所对应的上行信号所指示的M个元素中的一个，所述多个元素中的任意两个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的位置相同；根据所述M个求和结果和所述M个位置，确定所述下行预编码矩阵。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可根据M个求和结果，确定下行预编码矩阵，提供一种网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵的方式。在该实施方式中，无需网络设备分别确定多个终端设备的信道矩阵和下行预编码矩阵等，简化网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵的过程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自第一终端设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置，所述第一终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
在该实施方式中，多个终端设备中的一个终端设备(如第一终端设备)可确定该M个位置，并将该M个位置指示给网络设备，无需网络设备自行定这M个位置，可减少网络设备的处理量。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述多个终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可自行确定M个位置，并将M个位置指示给多个终端设备，以便于多个终端设备向网络设备发送M个位置上的M个元素。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应一个第二矩阵， 每个所述第二矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，其中，所述M个位置是根据所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的。
在该实施方式中，例如，网络设备可根据分别来自多个终端设备的上行参考信号，确定多个终端设备各自的第二矩阵，由于对于同一个终端设备，该终端设备的第一矩阵和第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置是相同的，因此在该实施方式中，网络设备可基于多个终端设备的第二矩阵中非零元素的位置，确定M个位置，提供了一种网络设备确定M个位置的方式。且，在该实施方式中，由网络设备确定M个位置，而不必终端设备确定，减少终端设备的处理量。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述M个位置为所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置的并集，或者，所述M个位置为所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置的交集。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可将多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置的交集或并集作为M个位置，如此可使得M个位置尽量保留多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，也就使得多个终端设备尽可能地上报多个终端设备的第一矩阵中的非零元素，从而使得网络设备可以尽可能地获取多个终端设备所对应的多个第一矩阵中的有效信息(非零元素)，从而有利于更准确地确定下行预编码矩阵。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：根据所述多个终端设备中的部分或全部终端设备的信道质量，确定至少一个功率控制参数，所述至少一个功率控制参数对应所述多个终端设备中的至少一个终端设备，所述至少一个功率控制参数中的每个功率控制参数是为所述至少一个终端设备中的一个终端设备的配置的功率控制参数，其中，所述功率控制参数用于确定所述发送所述上行信号的功率。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可参照多个终端设备中的部分或全部终端设备的信道质量，确定至少一个终端设备中的每个终端设备的功率控制参数，使得多个终端设备中每个终端设备发送上行信号的功率更为合理。并且，终端设备发送上行信号的功率，会影响网络设备接收上行信号的功率，因此调整多个终端设备发送上行信号的功率，有利于提高网络设备后续确定的下行预编码矩阵更适用于多个终端设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述至少一个功率控制参数中的一个功率控制参数包括期望功率和/或功率差值，所述期望功率是指网络设备期望所述一个功率控制参数所对应的终端设备发送所述上行信号的功率，或者网络设备期望接收的所述一个功率控制参数所对应的终端设备发送的所述上行信号的功率，所述功率差值是指所述一个功率控制参数所对应的终端设备发送两次所述上行信号的功率差值。
在该实施方式中，提供了功率控制参数的多种可能的实现方式，丰富了功率控制参数的可能性。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述至少一个终端设备分别发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示接收所述第一信息的终端设备对应的所述功率控制参数。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：根据所述下行预编码矩阵，向所述多个终端设备分别发送第一数据，其中，向所述多个终端设备发送所述第一数据所采用的调制与编码策略相同。
在该实施方式中，多个终端设备共享一个下行预编码矩阵，减少下行预编码矩阵的开 销。并且，多个终端设备共享一个调制与编码策略，也减少了调制与编码策略的开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自第一终端设备的应答信息，其中，所述应答信息用于指示第二终端设备是否成功接收所述第一数据，或者，用于指示所述多个终端设备是否均成功接收所述第一数据，所述第二终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
在该实施方式中，可以由一个终端设备(如第一终端设备)向网络设备反馈对第一数据的应答信息，而无需多个终端设备分别向网络设备发送应答信息，有利于减少终端设备与网络设备之间的交互次数。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二终端设备的信道质量小于或等于第一阈值。
在该实施方式中，第一终端设备可向网络设备反馈信道质量相对较小的第二终端设备的应答信息，以减少第一终端设备反馈的应答信息所占用的比特数量。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述应答信息。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可以灵活地指定一个终端设备(如第一终端设备)反馈应答信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：确定所述多个终端设备中的任意两个终端设备之间的信道相关性大于或等于第二阈值。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可选定信道相关性较大的多个终端设备，并确定这多个终端设备共享的一个下行预编码矩阵，以便于下行预编码矩阵可适用于这多个终端设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：确定待向所述多个终端设备传输的数据对应于同一种应用。
在该实施方式中，网络设备可选定这多个终端设备对应同一种应用，确定这多个终端设备共享的一个下行预编码矩阵，以便于网络设备向多个终端设备发送同一个数据。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由网络设备执行，也可以由芯片系统执行，该芯片系统可以实现网络设备的功能。为了便于描述，下文以网络设备执行为例。该方法包括：接收来自第一终端设备的下行预编码指示，所述下行预编码指示用于指示下行预编码矩阵；根据所述下行预编码矩阵向多个终端设备发送第一数据，所述多个终端设备包括所述第一终端设备。
在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备自行确定下行预编码指示，网络设备可根据下行预编码指示，获得下行预编码矩阵，减少且简化了网络设备的处理量。并且，多个终端设备共享一个下行预编码矩阵，有利于减小预编码矩阵的开销。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由芯片系统执行，芯片系统可以是实现终端设备的功能。为了便于描述，下文以第一终端设备执行为例。所述方法包括：向网络设备发送第一上行信号序列，所述第一上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素；向所述网络设备发送第二上行信号序列，所述第二上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素，所述第一上行信号序列和所述第二上行信号序列在同一个索引值的资源元素上的相位差不为2nπ，n为整数，并且，所述第一上行信号序列在第一索引值和第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差与所述第二上行信号序列在所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差之间的差值为2mπ，m为整数。
在该实施方式中，由于第一终端设备发送的第一上行信号序列和第二上行信号序列的 相位可变，使得网络设备接收的多个终端设备的上行信号序列之间的相位也可变，有利于网络设备提高确定多个终端设备共享的信道矩阵的协方差矩阵的准确性，也就有利于网络设备确定更准确的下行预编码矩阵。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自所述网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备的功率控制参数，所述功率控制参数用于确定所述第一终端设备发送所述第一上行信号序列和/或所述第二上行信号序列的功率。
在该实施方式中，第一终端设备可以根据网络设备指示的功率控制参数，确定发送第一上行信号序列和/或第二上行信号序列的功率，有利于第一终端设备顺利发送第一上行信号序列和/或第二上行信号序列。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由芯片系统执行，芯片系统可以是实现终端设备的功能。为了便于描述，下文以第一终端设备执行为例。所述方法包括：确定第一终端设备对应的第一矩阵的M个元素，其中，所述M个元素处于所述第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；在第一资源上向网络设备发送第一上行信号，其中，所述第一上行信号为模拟信号，且所述第一上行信号用于指示所述M个元素。
在本申请实施例中，第一终端设备可采用模拟信号上报该第一终端设备的第一矩阵中的M个元素，由于第一终端设备可不必上报第一矩阵中的所有元素，因此有利于减少第一终端设备的上报量，并且，采用模拟信号上报这M个元素，而不是采用数字信号上报这M个元素，因此避免了第一终端设备量化这M个元素所造成的量化损失。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自所述网络设备或其他终端设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置，所述其他终端设备是指多个终端设备中除了所述第一终端设备之外的终端设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，其中，所述其他终端设备为多个终端设备除了所述第一终端设备之外的终端设备，所述多个终端设备中的每个所述终端设备对应一个所述第一矩阵；根据所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，确定所述M个位置。
在该实施方式中，第一终端设备可接收来自其他终端设备的第一矩阵中的非零元素以及非零元素的位置，从而基于多个终端设备的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，确定M个位置，提供了一种第一终端设备确定M个位置的方式。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：所述第一终端设备向所述其他终端设备和/或所述网络设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由任一终端设备执行，也可以由芯片系统执行，芯片系统可以是实现终端设备的功能。为了便于描述，下文以第一终端设备执行为例。所述方法包括：确定M个求和结果，其中，每个所述求和结果为多个元素之和，所述多个元素与多个第一矩阵一一对应，所述多个元素中的每个元素为所对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素中的一个，所述M个元素处于所对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述多个元素中的任意两个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的位置 相同，所述多个第一矩阵中的每个第一矩阵与多个终端设备中的一个终端设备对应，每个所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示，所述预编码矩阵指示是根据所述M个求和结果确定的，所述预编码矩阵指示用于指示下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于发送数据。
在本申请实施例中，提供了一种网络设备获得多个终端设备共享的下行预编码矩阵的机制，在该机制中，可以由第一终端设备根据M个求和结果，自行确定用于指示下行预编码矩阵的下行预编码指示，网络设备可根据下行预编码指示，从而获得下行预编码矩阵，从而简化了网络设备的处理量。并且，多个终端设备可以共享一个下行预编码矩阵，有利于减小预编码矩阵的开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示发送所述第二信息的终端设备所对应的第一矩阵的非零元素和所述非零元素的位置，所述其他终端设备为所述多个终端设备中除了第一终端设备之外的终端设备，其中，所述M个位置是根据所述多个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的；或，接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示发送所述第三信息的终端设备所对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素，所述其他终端设备为所述多个终端设备中除了第一终端设备之外的终端设备，其中，所述多个终端设备中的任意两个终端设备所对应的M个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置相同。
在该实施方式中，可以由其他终端设备向第一终端设备发送所对应的第一矩阵的非零元素和非零元素的位置，进而该第一终端设备可自行确定M个位置，以及M个求个结果。或者，第一终端设备和其他终端设备预先获得了M个位置，其他终端设备可只向第一终端设备发送M个位置上的M个元素，进而第一终端设备可根据其他终端设备发送的这M个位置上的M个元素，从而确定M个求和位置，可相对减少其他终端设备向第一终端设备发送的数据量。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法包括：接收来自网络设备的第一数据；向所述网络设备发送应答信息，所述应答信息用于指示第二终端设备是否成功接收所述第一数据，或者，用于指示所述多个终端设备是否均成功接收所述第一数据，所述第二终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二终端设备的信道质量小于或等于第一阈值。
在一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述应答信息。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的网络设备，或者为配置在网络设备中的电子设备(例如，芯片系统)，或者为包括该网络设备的较大设备。该通信装置包括用于执行上述第一方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如，该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)和处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。
例如，所述收发模块，用于在第一资源上从多个终端设备接收多个上行信号，每个所述上行信号来自所述多个终端设备中的一个；所述处理模块，用于根据所述多个上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于向多个终端设备发送数据。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网 络设备，或者为配置在网络设备中的电子设备(例如，芯片系统)，或者为包括该网络设备的较大设备。该通信装置包括用于执行上述第二方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如，该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)和处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。
例如，所述收发模块，用于接收来自第一终端设备的下行预编码指示，所述下行预编码指示用于指示下行预编码矩阵；所述处理模块，用于根据所述下行预编码矩阵向多个终端设备发送第一数据，所述多个终端设备包括第一终端设备。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述第三方面中的终端设备，或者为配置在终端设备中的电子设备(例如，芯片系统)，或者为包括该终端设备的较大设备。该通信装置包括用于执行上述第三方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如，该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)和处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。
例如，所述收发模块，用于在处理模块的控制下，向网络设备发送第一上行信号序列，所述第一上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素，以及向所述网络设备发送第二上行信号序列，所述第二上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素，所述第一上行信号序列和所述第二上行信号序列在同一个索引值的资源元素上的相位差不为2nπ，n为整数，并且，所述第一上行信号序列在第一索引值和第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差与所述第二上行信号序列在所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差之间的差为2mπ，m为整数。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述第四方面中的终端设备，或者为配置在终端设备中的电子设备(例如，芯片系统)，或者为包括该终端设备的较大设备。该通信装置包括用于执行上述第四方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如，该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)和处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。
例如，所述处理模块，用于确定第一终端设备对应的第一矩阵的M个元素，其中，所述M个元素处于所述第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；所述收发模块，用于在第一资源上向网络设备发送第一上行信号，其中，所述第一上行信号为模拟信号，且所述第一上行信号用于指示所述M个元素。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述第五方面中的终端设备，或者为配置在终端设备中的电子设备(例如，芯片系统)，或者为包括该终端设备的较大设备。该通信装置包括用于执行上述第五方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如，该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)和处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。
例如，所述处理模块，用于确定M个求和结果，其中，每个所述求和结果为多个元素之和，所述多个元素与多个第一矩阵一一对应，所述多个元素中的每个元素为所对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素中的一个，所述M个元素处于所对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述多个元素中的任意两个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的位置相同，所述多个第一矩阵中的每个第一矩阵与多个终端设备中的一个终端设备对应，每个 所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；所述收发模块，用于向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示，所述预编码矩阵指示是根据所述M个求和结果确定的，所述预编码矩阵指示用于指示下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于发送数据。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第六方面所述的装置，以及第八方面所述的装置。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第六方面所述的装置，以及第九方面所述的装置。
第十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第七方面所述的装置，以及第十方面所述的装置。
第十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置，所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面或第五方面中任一项所述的方法。
可选的，该通信装置还包括其他部件，例如，天线，输入输出模块，存储器等。这些部件可以是硬件，软件，或者软件和硬件的结合。
第十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括：处理器和接口。其中，该处理器用于从该接口调用并运行指令，当该处理器执行该指令时，实现如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面或第五方面中任一项所述的方法。
第十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令，当其被运行时，实现如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面或第五方面中任一项所述的方法。
第十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，实现如上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面或第五方面中任一项所述的方法。
关于第六方面至第十七方面的有益效果，可参照第一方面至第五方面论述的有益效果，此处不再列举。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的UE和网络设备的天线结构示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种第三空频合并系数矩阵的示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的多个UE发送上行参考信号的一种示例图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的一种流程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的再一种通信方法的一种流程示意图；
图9和图10为本申请实施例提供的两种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
为了便于理解，下面对本申请实施例涉及的技术名词进行说明。应理解，下文技术名词的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例，并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。
1、大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple input multiple output，massive MIMO)，属于MIMO的一种扩展技术。大规模MIMO是第五代移动通信(5th generation，5G)中提高系统吞吐量和频谱利用率的关键技术。大规模MIMO下，发送设备和接收设备分别包括多个天线，且发送设备的多个天线各自可独立发送信号，同时在接收设备也可利用多个天线接收并恢复出信号。
2、预编码技术，发送设备(例如网络设备)可以在已知信道状态的情况下，借助与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行预编码，使得预编码后的待发送信号与信道相适配，从而降低了接收设备(例如终端设备)消除信道间影响的复杂度。因此，通过对待发送信号的预编码处理，可以提高接收设备(例如终端设备)所接收的信号的信号质量，信号质量例如通过信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)等参数来衡量。大规模MIMO是利用接收设备的多个天线接收信号，因此要求接收设备所接收的信号的信号质量要较好，否则容易出现接收失败的情况。而预编码技术有利于提高接收设备所接收的信号的信号质量，因此采用预编码技术有利于实现大规模MIMO。需要说明的是，在没有特别说明的情况下，本申请实施例涉及的信道矩阵可以是上行信道矩阵，也可以是下行信道矩阵。
3、频域单元，是设备(如终端设备)的频域资源的单位，可理解为频域资源的粒度。例如，频域单元的频域长度例如为一个子带(subband)的频域长度的a倍、一个资源块(resource block，RB)的频域长度、一个资源元素(resource element，RE)的频域长度的b倍，一个子载波的频域长度、一个资源块组(resource block group，RBG)的频域长度或一个预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group，PRG)的频域长度等。其中，a≤1，例如a的取值为1或1/2等，b为正整数。其中，子带的频域长度是不固定的，子带的频域长度可等于一个或多个RB的频域长度。
4、空间层，在MIMO中，一个空间层可以看成是一个可独立传输的数据流，一个发射天线的一个极化方向，或一个逻辑信道。为了提高频谱资源的利用率，提高通信系统的数据传输能力，网络设备可以同时通过多个空间层向终端设备发送数据。
空间层的数量小于或等于信道矩阵的秩。例如，终端设备可以根据信道矩阵确定空间层的数量，进一步确定预编码矩阵。需要说明的是，在没有特别说明的情况下，本申请实施例涉及的信道矩阵可以是上行信道矩阵，也可以是下行信道矩阵。
5、预编码矩阵，可以是根据信道矩阵确定的。例如，预编码矩阵可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行(singular value decomposition，SVD)获得，或者，也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decomposition，EVD)的方式获得。
其中，信道矩阵可以是基于参考信号，进行信道估计确定的，例如，根据如下公式(1)，确定信道矩阵。
H＝YX-1        (1)
其中，H表示信道矩阵，X表示发送设备向接收设备发送的参考信号，X-1表示参考信号的逆矩阵，Y表示接收设备实际接收到的与参考信号对应的信号。
或者例如，根据上行信道和下行信道的互易性，将其中上行信道或下行信道中的一个信道的信道矩阵作为上行信道或下行信道中的另一个信道的信道矩阵。
一个预编码矩阵可以包括一个或多个向量，如列向量。一个预编码矩阵可以用于确定一个或多个预编码向量。
当空间层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数也为1时，预编码矩阵就是预编码向量。
或者，当空间层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数为1时，预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个空间层上的分量。
或者，当空间层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数为多个时，预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个极化方向上的分量。
或者，当空间层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数也为多个时，预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个空间层、一个极化方向上的分量。
应理解，预编码向量也可以由预编码矩阵中的向量确定，如，对预编码矩阵中的向量进行数学变换后得到。本申请对于预编码矩阵与预编码向量之间的数学变换关系不作限定。
6、空频分量矩阵，是由从空域向量(spatial domain vector)集合中选择的一个或多个空域向量，与从频域向量集合中选择的一个或多个频域向量确定的。其中，空域向量集合和频域向量集合可以是由协议配置在设备中。换言之，被选择的一个或多个空域向量和被选择的一个或多个频域向量可以构建一个或多个空频分量矩阵，其中，一个空域向量和一个频域向量则称为空频向量对。
7、空频矩阵，可以理解为是用于确定预编码矩阵或信道矩阵的一个中间量。例如，终端设备可以通过预编码矩阵或信道矩阵确定空频矩阵。网络设备可以是对多个空频分量矩阵的加权和得到空频矩阵，以用于恢复信道矩阵或预编码矩阵。
具体地，被选择的一个或多个空域向量可以构成空域矩阵W1，其中W1中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个空域向量。被选择的一个或多个频域向量可以构成频域矩阵W3，其中W3中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个频域向量。其中，被选择的一个或多个空域向量与被选择的一个或多个频域向量线性合并的结果可称为空频矩阵K，空频矩阵K的一种计算公式如下：
其中，H表示共轭转置，表示空频合并系数矩阵。
对于某个空间层，可以表示由多个空频合并系数构成的空频合并系数矩阵。该空频合并系数矩阵中的一行可以对应某个极化方向上的一个空域向量，该空频合并系数矩阵中的一列可以对应一个频域向量。
可选的，多个空间层中每个空间层对应的频域向量和空域向量，被选择用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置和每个空频向量对的合并系数(又可称为非零系数或空频合并系数)的位置对应。
其中，用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置具体是指，用来构建的预编码矩阵的空域向量在终端设备所上报的空域向量中的位置以及用来构建的预编码矩阵的频域向量在终端设备所上报的频域向量中的位置。由于每个空频向量对与一个合并系数对应，故用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置也就是非零系数的位置。
例如，空频矩阵K可具体表示为：K＝[w0，w1...wN-1]。其中，w0至wN-1是与Nf个频域单元对应的Nf个列向量，每个列向量可以是每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵，各列向量的长度均可以为Ns。该Nf个列向量分别对应Nf个频域单元的预编码向量。即空频矩阵可以视为将Nf个频域单元对应的预编码向量组合构成的联合矩阵。
可选的，空频矩阵可以与空间层对应。由于终端设备可以基于每个空间层反馈频域向量、空域向量和合并系数，确定空频矩阵，因此可以认为空频矩阵与空间层对应。网络设备基于终端设备反馈的一个空间层的频域向量、空域向量和合并系数，从而确定空频矩阵，也就相当于网络设备确定了与该空间层对应的空频矩阵。与空间层对应的空频矩阵可直接用于确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。与某一频域单元对应的预编码矩阵例如可以是由各个空间层对应的空频矩阵中对应于同一频域单元的列向量构造而成。这种情况下，发送设备的Nf个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵的计算方式也可参照为上述公式(2)。
例如，将各空间层对应的空频矩阵中的第n(0≤n≤N3－1，且n为整数)个列向量抽取出来，按照空间层的顺序由左到右排布可得到维度为Ns×Z的矩阵，Z表示空间层数，Z≥1且为整数。并对该矩阵进行归一化处理，例如乘以功率归一化系数等，便可以得到该第n个频域单元的预编码矩阵。
应理解，空频矩阵仅为用于确定预编码矩阵或信道矩阵的中间量的一种表现形式，不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。例如，将空频矩阵中的各列向量按从左至右的顺序依次首位相接，或者按照其他预定义的规则排列，也可以得到长度为Ns×Nf的向量，该向量可以称为空频向量。
还应理解，上文所示的空频矩阵和空频向量的维度仅为示例，不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。例如，该空频矩阵也可以是维度为Nf×Ns的矩阵。其中，每个行向量可对应于一个频域单元，以用于确定所对应的频域单元的预编码矩阵。
此外，当发送设备的发射天线配置有多个极化方向时，该空频矩阵的维度还可以进一步扩展。如，对于双极化方向天线，该空频矩阵的维度可以为2Ns×Nf或Nf×2Ns。应理解，本申请实施例对于发射天线的极化方向数不作限定。
8、天线端口，可以简称为端口，可以理解为被接收设备所识别的发射天线，或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以预配置一个天线端口，其中每个虚拟天线可以是多个物理天线的加权组合。当某个天线端口用于发送一个参考信号时，该天线端口又可以称为该参考信号的端口，例如，一个天线端口用于发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)，则该天线端口可称为SRS端口。在本申请实施例中，该参考信号可以是未经过预编码的参考信号，也可以是经过预编码的参考信号，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
9、空域向量，也可以称为空域分量向量、波束(beam)向量、空域波束基向量、空域基向量或空域基底等。空域向量中的各个元素可以表示发送设备的各个天线端口(antenna port)的权重。接收设备可基于空域向量中各个元素所表示的各个天线端口的权重，将发送设备的各个天线端口的信号做线性叠加，可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。
可选的，空域向量例如离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transform，DFT)向量。DFT向量可以是指DFT矩阵中的向量。
10、频域向量(frequency domain vector)，也可以称为频域分量向量、频域基向量、 或频域基底等，可用于表示信道在频域的变化规律。每个频域向量可以表示一种变化规律。其中，终端设备在不同的空间层对应的频域向量可以相同，也可以不相同。
11、空频合并系数矩阵，也可以称为空频联合系数矩阵、或加权系数矩阵等。空频合并系数矩阵包括至少一个元素，这至少一个元素中的每个元素为非零元素或零元素，其中每个非零元素可称为一个合并系数(又可称为非零系数或空频合并系数)。其中，空频合并系数矩阵中的一个空频合并系数对应一个空域向量和一个频域向量。例如，空频合并系数矩阵中的一个非零元素可以是第i个空域向量与第j个频域向量构成的空频向量对所对应的合并系数。
为了便于区分，在本申请实施例中，将终端设备基于下行信号(如上行参考信号)确定出的空频合并系数矩阵称为第一矩阵(又可以称为第一空频合并系数矩阵或下行空频合并系数矩阵)，第一空频合并系数矩阵对应的频域向量也可称为下行频域向量或第一频域向量，第一矩阵对应的空域向量也可称为下行空域向量或第一空域向量。同理，可以将网络设备(如基站)基于上行信号确定出的空频合并系数矩阵，称为第二矩阵(又可以称为第二空频合并系数矩阵或上行空频合并系数矩阵)，第二矩阵对应的频域向量也可称为上行频域向量或第二频域向量，第二矩阵对应的空域向量也可对应称为上行空域向量或第二空域向量。
12、预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator，PMI)，可用于确定预编码矩阵。例如，终端设备可以确定预编码矩阵，并通过PMI向网络设备指示该预编码矩阵，网络设备可基于该PMI恢复该预编码矩阵。其中，网络设备恢复得到的预编码矩阵可以与终端设备确定出的预编码矩阵相同或相近似。
在下行信道测量中，网络设备根据PMI确定的预编码矩阵与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵的近似度越高，网络设备根据PMI所确定的预编码矩阵与下行信道也就更适配，因此也就能够提高信号的传输质量。
应理解，PMI仅为一种命名，不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请实施例并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他名称的信息以用于相同或相似功能的可能。
13、终端设备，是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以是固定设备，移动设备、手持设备、穿戴设备、车载设备，或内置于上述设备中的无线装置(例如，通信模块或芯片系统等)。所述终端设备用于连接人，物，机器等，可广泛用于各种场景，例如包括但不限于以下场景：蜂窝通信、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-typecommunications，M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things，IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通，智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。所述终端设备有时可称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、用户端设备(customer premise equipment，CPE)、终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等等。本申请实施例是以终端设备为UE进行说明。
14、网络设备，例如包括接入网网元(或，称为接入网设备)，和/或核心网网元(或，称为核心网设备)。
接入网网元，为具有无线收发功能的设备，用于与所述UE进行通信。所述接入网网 元包括但不限于上述通信系统中的基站(BTS,Node B,eNodeB/eNB，或gNodeB/gNB)、收发点(t(R)ANsmission reception point，TRP)，3GPP后续演进的基站，无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)系统中的接入节点，无线中继节点，无线回传节点等。所述基站可以是：宏基站，微基站，微微基站，小站，中继站等。多个基站可以支持上述提及的同一种接入技术的网络，也可以支持上述提及的不同接入技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的传输接收点。网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，C(R)AN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit，CU)，又可以称为汇聚单元，和/或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)。网络设备还可以是服务器，可穿戴设备，或车载设备等。例如，车到一切V2X技术中的网络设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。以下对接入网设备以为基站为例进行说明。所述通信系统中的多个网络设备可以为同一类型的基站，也可以为不同类型的基站。基站可以与UE进行通信，也可以通过中继站与UE进行通信。UE可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。
所述核心网网元用于实现移动管理，数据处理，会话管理，策略和计费等功能中的至少一项。不同接入技术的系统中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同，本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。以5G系统为例，所述核心网网元包括：接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function，SMF)、PCF或用户面功能(user plane function，UPF)等。
本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
本申请实施例中，对于名词的数目，除非特别说明，表示“单数名词或复数名词”，即"一个或多个”。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如，A/B，表示：A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，表示：a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a和b和c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
除非有特定的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度，例如，本申请实施例中的“第一上行信号”和“第二上行信号”用于表示两个信号，并不限定两个信号的类型、发送顺序、接收顺序或优先级等。
为了简化确定多个UE的预编码矩阵的过程，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，在该方法中，网络设备可为多个UE配置同一个资源(例如第一资源)，这多个UE可在同一个资源上向网络设备发送上行信号，网络设备可根据这多个UE的上行信号，确定一个下行预编码矩阵，网络设备向这多个UE发送数据时，均可采用该下行预编码矩阵对数据进行预编码，也就是说，网络设备无需为每个UE分别确定预编码矩阵，而是确定多个UE共享的一个下行预编码矩阵，如此，有利于简化网络设备确定多个UE的预编码矩阵的过程，并降低了网络设备计算预编码矩阵的资源开销。
请参照图1，为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图，或者可理解为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构图。如图1所示，该通信系统包括多个UE和为多个UE服务的网络设备120。其中，图1是以多个UE包括第一UE111和第二UE112为例。网络设备120包括一个或多个天线，其中，网络设备120包括的一个或多个天线可具有一个或多个极化方向。同理，一个UE可包括一个或多个天线，UE包括的一个或多个天线可具有一个或多个极化方向。
其中，第一UE111可与网络设备120通信，第二UE112可与网络设备120通信。
在一种可能的实施方式中，网络设备120可以配置UE组，或者，UE组也可由协议规定。其中，一个UE组包括多个UE，例如一个UE组包括第一UE111和第二UE112。
作为一个示例，网络设备120可向UE组中的多个UE发送分组信息，分组信息用于指示UE组的组标识，相当于指示了一个UE所属的UE组。如此，网络设备120可通过UE组的组标识，对该UE组进行组播。
可选的，该分组信息还包括UE组中的所有UE的标识。分组信息包括UE组中的所有UE的标识。如此，一个UE组中的UE之间可相互通信。可选的，UE组中的任意两个UE之间可采用侧链路(sidelink，SL)通信。
作为一个示例，网络设备120可对UE组进行更新。其中，对一个UE组进行更新，可包括网络设备120增加或减少该UE组所包括的UE的数量，和/或，网络设备用新的UE替换该UE组内的原有的UE。
示例性的，由于网络设备120服务的UE可能发生变化、UE的上行信道可能发生变化、UE的下行信道可能发生变化、或UE执行的业务可能发生变化等一种或多种原因，均可能导致网络设备120更新UE组。
在网络设备120配置了UE组的情况下，作为一个示例，网络设备120可采用组播的方式向UE组发送数据。本申请实施例中的组播又可以称为多播。或者，网络设备120也可采用单播的方式向UE组中的UE分别发送数据。
为了更好地介绍本申请实施例，下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。在本申请的各个实施例对应的附图中，凡是可选的步骤均用虚线表示。本申请的各个实施例所提供的方法均可应用于图1所示的场景。本申请的各个实施例所涉及的多个UE包括第一UE和第二UE。本申请的各个实施例中的第一UE和第二UE例如为图1所示场景中的任一UE。本申请的各个实施例所涉及的网络设备，例如为图1所示的网络设备120。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，请参照图2，为该方法的流程示意图。
S201，网络设备发送信息1。相应的，多个UE接收信息1。在图2中，以第一UE和第二UE接收信息1为例。该信息1可指示用于发送上行信号的第一资源。信息1又可以称为第四信息。
网络设备可通过第一信令发送信息1。第一信令例如为高层信令，高层信令例如为无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令或媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)控制元素(control element，CE)等；或者，第一信令例如为物理层信令，物理层信令例如为下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)等，本申请实施例对网络设备发送信息1的方式不做限定。
信息1指示的第一资源可以是半静态调度(semi-persistent scheduling，SPS)资源，也就是说，多个UE中的任一UE可利用该第一资源，向网络设备发送多次上行信号。或者， 信息1指示的第一资源为动态调度的资源，也就是说，多个UE中的任一UE可利用该第一资源，向网络设备发送一次上行信号。其中，第一资源可包括时域资源、频域资源或码域资源中的一种或多种。时域资源的单位例如为时隙(slot)、帧(frame)、子帧(subframe)、迷你时隙(mini-slot)、正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号或传输时间间隔(transmission time interval，TTI)等。频域资源的粒度例如为频域单元，频域单元的含义可参照前文。
作为一个示例，网络设备可通过单播的方式向第一UE和第二UE分别发送信息1，在这种情况下，S201可包括S201a和S201b，其中，S201a为网络设备向第一UE发送信息1，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的信息1；S201b为网络设备向第二UE发送信息1，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的信息1。
其中，S201a和S201b的执行顺序可以是任意的，例如，同时执行S201a和S201b；或者，先执行S201a，再执行S201b；或者，先执行S201b，再执行S201a。
作为另一个示例，第一UE和第二UE属于同一个UE组，则网络设备可通过组播的方式向第一UE和第二UE所在的UE组发送信息1。示例性的，第一信令可包括该UE组的标识，也就相当于网络设备向第一UE和第二UE发送了信息1。
下面对网络设备配置UE组的方式进行示例介绍。在本申请实施例中是将第一UE和第二UE配置在同一个UE组为例进行介绍。
方式1，网络设备将多个UE中执行同一种业务的UE配置在一个UE组中。换言之，一个UE组包括的UE执行同一种业务。
其中，一个UE执行一种业务，可理解为该UE当前被用于实现该种业务。业务例如包括扩展现实(extended reality，XR)、网络视频直播业务、网络课堂、在线会议或云游戏等。其中，XR业务可包括虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)业务、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)业务或混合现实(mixed reality，MR)业务等一种或多种。
示例性的，网络设备确定待向第一UE和第二UE发送的数据对应同一种应用，表示第一UE和第二UE需执行同一种业务，网络设备可将第一UE和第二UE配置在一个UE组中。
例如，网络设备确定需向第一UE和第二UE发送XR业务对应的同一种应用的数据，则网络设备确定将第一UE和第二UE配置在一个UE组中。
方式2，网络设备将多个UE中信道相关性大于第一阈值的UE配置在一个UE组中。换言之，UE组中的任意两个UE中的信道相关性大于第一阈值。信道例如为上行信道或下行信道。
示例性的，网络设备可确定第一UE的信道矩阵，以及第二UE的信道矩阵，并确定第一UE和第二UE之间的信道矩阵的相关性。例如，网络设备将第一UE和第二UE的信道矩阵的相似度确定为第一UE和第二UE之间的信道矩阵相关性。如果第一UE和第二UE的信道相关性大于第一阈值，则网络设备可将第一UE和第二UE配置在一个UE组中。
其中，网络设备确定第一UE和第二UE的信道矩阵的方式可以是相同的，以网络设备确定第一UE的信道矩阵为例进行介绍。
示例性的，网络设备可根据来自第一UE的一个上行参考信号(如第一上行参考信号)，第一上行参考信号例如为SRS，确定第一UE的信道矩阵。
方式3，网络设备将多个UE中信道相关性大于第一阈值的UE，且需执行同一种业务 的UE配置在一个UE组中。换言之，一个UE组包括多个UE需执行同一种业务的UE，且任意两个UE中的信道相关性大于第一阈值。
其中，网络设备确定多个UE中需执行同一种业务的UE，以及确定多个UE中的任意两个UE中的信道相关性的方式可参照前文，此处不再列举。
S202，多个UE在第一资源上向网络设备分别发送上行信号。相应的，网络设备在第一资源上接收来自多个UE的上行信号。
图2以多个UE包括第一UE和第二UE为例。S202可包括S202a和S202b，其中，S202a为第一UE向网络设备发送第一上行信号U1，相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第一上行信号U1；S202b为第二UE向网络设备发送第二上行信号U2，相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第二上行信号U2。
其中，S202a和S202b的执行顺序可以是任意的，例如，同时执行S202a和S202b；或者，先执行S202a，再执行S202b；或者，先执行S202b，再执行S202a。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2可以在第一资源上叠加为第三上行信号U3。
具体的，由于第一UE是在第一资源上发送的第一上行信号U1，第二UE也是在第一资源上发送的第二上行信号U2，因此这第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2可以在第一资源上叠加，相当于网络设备在第一资源上接收到的是第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2的叠加结果。为了便于区分，本申请实施例将这第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2的叠加结果称为第三上行信号U3。
其中，第三上行信号U3包括第一叠加结果、第二叠加结果和第三叠加结果中的一种或多种。第一叠加结果为第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2在频域或时域上的叠加结果。第二叠加结果为第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2在天线域或波束域上的叠加结果。第三叠加结果为第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2在码域上的叠加结果。
可选的，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2在频域、时域、天线域、波束域或码域均可表示为复数形式(具体例如为复数向量或复数矩阵)，这种情况下，第三上行信号U3可视为复数之和。
例如，如果第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2为复数向量，那么第三上行信号U3对应为复数向量。如果第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2为复数矩阵，那么第三上行信号U3对应为复数矩阵。
其中，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2有多种可能的实现方式，下面分别介绍。
第一种可能的实现方式，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2均为上行参考信号。该上行参考信号例如为SRS或者解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)。
第二种可能的实现方式，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2均为模拟信号，第一上行信号U1用于指示第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素。可以进一步理解为，第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素被承载模拟信号上，第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素被承载在模拟信号上。其中，M为正整数。第一矩阵的含义可参照前文论述的内容。
需要说明的是，第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素在第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置均不同。并且，第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素在第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置均不同。
作为一个示例，第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素在第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置，与第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素在第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置相同。可以进一步理解为，第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素中的每个元素在第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的位置，与第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素中的每个元素在第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的位置相同。
例如，M个位置包括位置(1，2)，该位置对应第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的第1行中的第2个元素，也对应第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的第1行中的第2个元素。
可选的，M个位置可以是网络设备配置给多个UE的，或者是多个UE自行协商确定的，或者是由协议配置在多个UE中的，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一上行信号U1可用于指示第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第二UE在P个空间层中第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个元素。其中，P为大于或等于1的整数，K为小于或等于P的正整数。
具体的，第一UE和第二UE均对应P个空间层，第一UE和第二UE也就均对应P个第一矩阵。其中，第一UE对应的P个第一矩阵中的一个第一矩阵对应第一UE对应的P个空间层中的一个空间层。第二UE对应的P个第一矩阵中的一个第一矩阵对应第二UE对应的P个空间层中的一个空间层。
这种示例下，第一上行信号U1指示的第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个元素对应的M个位置，以及第二上行信号U2指示的第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个元素对应的M个位置可以是相同的。换言之，所述M个位置可理解为第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵与第二上行信号U2指示的第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵相同的M个位置。
例如，第一UE和第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个位置均包括第一矩阵的第1行中的第1个位置，以及第2行中的第3个位置。
可选的，第一UE在P个空间层中的任意两个空间层上的第一矩阵对应的M个位置是相同的，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的任意两个空间层上的第一矩阵对应的M个位置是相同的。可以进一步理解为，M个位置是第一UE的P个第一矩阵对应的，也是与第二UE的P个第一矩阵对应的。
例如，第一UE包括2个空间层(相当于P的取值为2)，具体为第一个空间层和第二个空间层。第一UE在第一个空间层上的第一矩阵对应的M个位置包括在第一个空间层上的第一矩阵中的第1行中的第1个位置，以及第2行中的第3个位置。第一UE在第二个空间层上的第一矩阵对应的M个位置也包括在第一个空间层上的第一矩阵中的第1行中的第1个位置，以及第2行中的第3个位置。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，第一上行信号U1可用于指示第一UE在R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第二UE在T个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个元素。其中，R和T均为正整数，R和T的取值可以相同或不同。
具体的，第一UE包括R个天线(或天线端口)，第一UE也就对应R个第一矩阵。第二UE包括T个天线(或天线端口)，第二UE也就对应T个第一矩阵。其中，第一UE 对应的R个第一矩阵中的一个第一矩阵对应第一UE对应的R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个。第二UE对应的T个第一矩阵中的一个第一矩阵对应第二UE对应的T个天线(或天线端口)中的一个。
这种情况下，第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素在第一UE的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵的M个位置，与第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素在第二UE的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵的M个位置可以是相同的。换言之，所述M个位置对应了第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素在第一UE的R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个位置，也对应了第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素在第二UE的T个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个位置。
S203，网络设备根据第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2，确定下行预编码矩阵。
该下行预编码矩阵用于网络设备向多个UE发送数据，可以进一步理解为该下行预编码矩阵是网络设备用于对第一UE和第二UE进行下行传输，下行传输例如传输物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)或物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)等。换言之，该下行预编码矩阵第一UE和第二UE共享的一个预编码矩阵。
示例性的，网络设备可根据该下行预编码矩阵，对第一UE和第二UE待发送的数据进行预编码。
其中，上述第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2的内容不同时，网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵的方式也有区别，下面分别进行介绍。
示例1，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2均为上述第一种可能实现方式中的参考信号。
网络设备可联合第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2，确定第一上行信道矩阵。例如，网络设备可将第三上行信号U3作为上述公式(1)中的Y，将第一上行信号U1或第二上行信号U2作为上述公式(1)中的X，从而基于上述公式(1)确定出第一上行信道矩阵。该第一上行信道矩阵相当于表征了多个UE的信道，或可视为多个UE的信道矩阵和。
网络设备确定第一上行信道矩阵之后，网络设备可基于上行信道和下行信道的互易性，从而获得第一下行信道矩阵。网络设备可对第一下行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解或SVD，获得下行预编码矩阵。或者，网络设备对第一下行信道矩阵进行特征值分解或SVD，获得下行预编码矩阵。
示例2，第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2均为上述第二种可能实现方式中的模拟信号，以及第一上行信号U1用于指示第一UE的第一矩阵的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第一UE的第一矩阵的M个元素。
具体的，网络设备根据第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2，确定第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素中的第i个元素与第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素中第j个元素的和，i和j可依次从1取到M。其中，i和j的取值可以相同或不同。以此类推，网络设备可获得M个求和结果。其中，第i个元素在第一UE对应的第一矩阵中的位置与第j个元素在第二UE对应的第一矩阵中的位置是相同的。网络设备根据这M个求和结果和M个位置，确定下行预编码矩阵。
示例性的，网络设备根据这M个求和结果和M个位置，确定一个空频合并系数矩阵， 为了便于区分，本申请实施例中将所述一个空频合并系数矩阵称为第三矩阵。其中，M个求和结果为第三矩阵中的M个元素。
可选的，M个求和结果在第三矩阵中对应的M个位置与前文中的所述M个位置相同。其中，一个求和结果为第三矩阵中的一个合并系数。进而网络设备根据第三矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。
作为一个示例，在第一上行信号U1可用于指示第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层的第一矩阵中的M个元素的情况下，这种情况下，确定的第三矩阵可理解为一个空间层上的空频合并系数矩阵。网络设备可从空域向量集合和频域向量集合中，确定与第三矩阵中的M个求和结果中的每个求和结果对应的一个空域向量和一个频域向量。以此类推，网络设备可确定出M个求和结果对应的M个空域向量，以及M个频域向量。其中，这M个空域向量则构成空域矩阵，这M个频域向量则构成一个频域矩阵。其中，空域向量集合和频域向量集合可被预配置在网络设备中的，例如通过协议预配置在网络设备中。网络设备根据第三矩阵、与M个空域向量构成的空域矩阵、以及M个频域向量构成的频域矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。例如，网络设备可将第三矩阵、与M个空域向量构成的空域矩阵、以及M个频域向量构成的频域矩阵代入上述公式(2)中，获得下行预编码矩阵。
请参照图3，为本申请实施例提供的UE和网络设备的天线结构示意图。如图3所示，网络设备包括2*N1*N2个天线，且网络设备包括的所有天线包括两个极化方向。其中，“*”表示乘积。在图3中仅示意了第一UE的天线结构。如图3所示，第一UE包括N3个天线，且第一UE包括的所有天线包括两个极化方向。在图3中，带箭头的一条线则可视为一个空间层。
继续以图3的天线结构为例，且以第一UE和第二UE均对应2个空间层(如空间层1和空间层2)为例。第一上行信号U1指示的M个元素包括第一UE在空间层1上的第一矩阵在第1行第3个位置上的元素、在第2行第6个位置上的元素、以及在第Nt行第8个位置上的元素。其中，Nt＝2*N1*N2。同理，第二上行信号U2指示的M个元素包括第二UE在空间层1上的第一矩阵在第1行第3个位置上的元素、在第2行第6个位置上的元素、在第Nt行第8个位置上的元素。
如此，网络设备可根据第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2，确定第一UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第1行第3个位置上的元素与第二UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第1行第3个位置上的元素之和，第一UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第2行第6个位置上的元素与第二UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第2行第6个位置上的元素之和，第一UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第Nt行第8个位置上的元素与第二UE对应的空间层1的第一矩阵的第Nt行第8个位置上的元素之和，相当于网络设备获得了4个求和结果。
网络设备根据空间层1对应的4个求和结果，确定如图4所示的空间层1上的第三矩阵。在图4中，以虚线填充的矩形框表示网络设备所确定出的4个求和结果在第三矩阵中的位置。网络设备可基于空间层1上的第三矩阵，确定与该空间层1上的第三矩阵对应的空域矩阵和频域矩阵，进而根据该空间层1上的第三矩阵、与该空间层1上的空域矩阵和频域矩阵，确定空间层1上的下行预编码矩阵。
或者例如，第一上行信号U1指示第一UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵在第1行第6个 位置上的元素、在第1行第7个位置上的元素、在第1行第9个位置上的元素、在第2行第6个位置上的元素、以及在第Nt行第8个位置上的元素。第二上行信号U2指示第二UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵在第1行第7个位置上的元素、第1行第9个位置上的元素、在第2行第6个位置上的元素、以及在第Nt行第8个位置上的元素。
网络设备可根据第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2，第一UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第1行第7个位置上的元素与第二UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第1行第7个位置上的元素之和，第一UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第2行第6个位置上的元素与第二UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第2行第6个位置上的元素之和，第一UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第1行第9个位置上的元素与第二UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第1行第9个位置上的元素之和，以及第一UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第Nt行第8个位置上的元素与第二UE在空间层2上的第一矩阵的第Nt行第8个位置上的元素之和，从而网络设备可获得3个求和结果。
网络设备可根据空间层2对应的3个求和结果，确定如图4所示的空间层2上的第三矩阵。网络设备可基于空间层2上的第三矩阵，确定与空间层2上的第三矩阵对应的空域矩阵和频域矩阵，进而根据空间层2上的第三矩阵、与空间层2上的第三矩阵对应的空域矩阵和频域矩阵，确定空间层2上的下行预编码矩阵。
作为另一个示例，在第一上行信号U1用于指示第一UE在R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个元素，以及第二上行信号U2用于指示第二UE在T个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的M个元素的情况下，网络设备确定的第三矩阵相当于为一个天线对所对应的第三矩阵，该天线对包括第一UE中的一个天线和第二UE中的一个天线。网络设备可确定与第三矩阵对应的空域矩阵和频域矩阵，并根据第三矩阵、空域矩阵和频域矩阵，从而获得该天线对所对应的信道矩阵。网络设备可根据该天线对所对应的信道矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。其中，确定第三矩阵对应的空域矩阵和频域矩阵的方式可参照前文论述的内容。
其中，在第一UE的R个天线和第二UE的T个天线的数量关系不同的情况下，网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵的方式有所区别，下面分别说明。
情况一，在第一UE和第二UE的天线数量相同，且第一UE和第二UE均只有一个天线(即R和T均为1)的情况下，网络设备可以确定一个天线对对应的一个信道矩阵，获得下行预编码矩阵。例如，网络设备可采用最大比合并算法(maximal ratio combining，MRC)，对该天线对对应的该天线对的信道矩阵进行处理，以获得下行预编码矩阵。
情况二，在第一UE和第二UE的天线数量相同，且第一UE和第二UE均包括多个天线(即R和T相同，且R和T均大于或等于2)的情况下，网络设备可确定R个信道矩阵，R个信道矩阵与R个天线对对应，其中每个信道矩阵与一个天线对对应，R个天线对中的每个天线对包括第一UE的R个天线中的一个天线和第二UE的T个天线中的一个天线。其中，网络设备确定R个信道矩阵中的每个信道矩阵的方式可参照前文论述的网络设备确定一个天线对所对应的信道矩阵的内容，此处不再列举。网络设备可对这R个信道矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。或者，网络设备对这R个信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。
情况三，在第一UE和第二UE的天线数量不相同，且假设第一UE的R个天线数量大于第二UE的T个天线数量(即R大于T)的情况下。在这种假设下，网络设备可获得 F个信道矩阵。其中，F的取值是根据R和/或T确定的。网络设备可对这F个信道矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。或者，网络设备对这F个信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。
其中，F的取值不同，则F个信道矩阵的确定方式也有区别，下面分别介绍。
作为一个示例，F等于T。这种情况下，F个信道矩阵与T个天线对对应，且其中每个信道矩阵对应一个天线对。其中，T个天线对中的每个天线对包括第一UE的R个天线中的一个天线和第二UE的T个天线中的一个天线。这种情况下，F个信道矩阵中的每个信道矩阵的确定方式可参照前文情况一中确定一个天线对所对应的信道矩阵的内容，此处不再列举。
作为另一个示例，F等于R。这种情况下，F个信道矩阵中的T个信道矩阵可与T个天线对对应，其中，T个信道矩阵的含义和T个信道矩阵中的每个信道矩阵的确定方式可参照前文示例中论述的内容，此处不再列举。
可选的，所述F个信道矩阵中的其余(F-T)个信道矩阵中的每个信道矩阵可以为第一UE中的剩余(R-T)个天线中的一个天线所对应的信道矩阵。所述其余(F-T)个信道矩阵是指所述F个信道矩阵中除了所述T个信道矩阵之外的信道矩阵。
例如，网络设备根据来自第一UE发送的第(T+1)个上行信号，确定第一UE的第(T+1)个天线对应的信道矩阵。以此类推，网络设备可获得第一UE的(F-T)个信道矩阵。
其中，第(T+1)个上行信号可为上行参考信号；或者，第(T+1)个上行信号可为模拟信号或数字信号，且所述第(T+1)个上行信号用于指示第一UE在R个天线中的第(T+1)个天线所对应的第一矩阵中的非零元素或M个元素。所述M个元素在第一UE在R个天线中的所述第(T+1)个天线对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置也可以是前文中的所述M个位置。
S204，网络设备发送第一数据。相应的，多个UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
其中，第一数据可以是网络设备基于第一下行预编码对待发送的数据进行预编码得到的。如果第一UE和第二UE对应同一种业务，则第一数据可为该业务对应的数据，该数据的形式例如为数据流。
作为一个示例，网络设备可采用单播的方式向多个UE发送第一数据。这种情况下，S204具体包括S204a和S204b，其中，S204a为网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据；S204b为网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
其中，S204a和S204b的执行顺序可以是任意的，例如，同时执行S204a和S204b；或者，先执行S204a，再执行S204b；或者，先执行S204b，再执行S204a。
作为另一个示例，网络设备可采用组播的方式向多个UE发送第一数据。例如，网络设备可基于UE组(UE组包括第一UE和第二UE)的组标识，向UE组发送第一数据，也就相当于向第一UE和第二UE发送了第一数据。
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一UE可对第一数据中的第一部分数据进行处理(如解码或显示)，第二UE可对第一数据中的第二部分数据处理(如解码或显示)。其中，第一部分数据可为第一数据中的部分或全部数据，第二部分数据也可为第一数据中的部分或全部数据，且第一部分数据和第二部分数据不同。
示例性的，虽然第一UE和第二UE均接收来自网络设备的第一数据，但是第一UE 和第二UE可根据各自实际业务处理的需求，有选择地处理第一数据中的部分或全部数据。
例如，第一UE和第二UE对应XR业务，第一UE和第二UE接收第一数据之后，第一UE和第二UE可以根据第一数据，呈现不同视角上的XR业务对应的界面。
在图2所示的实施例中，多个UE可在第一资源上向网络设备发送上行信号，这样有利于降低发送上行信号的资源开销。并且，网络设备可根据来自多个UE的上行信号，确定多个UE共享的一个下行预编码矩阵，提供了一种计算下行预编码矩阵的一种方式，且无需为每个UE单独确定下行预编码矩阵，有利于降低网络设备简化计算预编码矩阵的过程，以及减少计算下行预编码矩阵的开销。并且，由于多个UE是共享一个下行预编码矩阵，也有利于降低多个UE的预编码矩阵的资源开销，另外，网络设备向多个UE发送数据时，可采用该下行预编码矩阵对该数据进行处理一次，便可向多个UE发送处理后的数据，有利于减少网络设备的预编码过程中的处理量。
请参照图5，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。在图5中以图2所示的实施例中的第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2为第一种可能实现方式中的上行参考信号为例进行介绍。
S501，网络设备向第一UE发送第一下行参考信号S1。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一下行参考信号S1。该第一下行参考信号S1例如为信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal，CSI-RS)。
作为一个示例，第一UE可在第二资源上向网络设备发送第一下行参考信号S1。第二资源的含义可参照前文第一资源的内容。第二资源可以是网络设备配置给第一UE的。
S502，网络设备向第二UE发送第二下行参考信号S2。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第二下行参考信号S2。该第二下行参考信号S2例如为CSI-RS。
作为一个示例，第二UE可在第三资源上向网络设备发送第二下行参考信号S2。第三资源的含义可参照前文第一资源的内容。第三资源可以是网络设备配置给第二UE的。可选的，第二资源与第三资源不同。
其中，S501和S502的执行顺序可以是任意的，例如，同时执行S501和S502；或者，先执行S501，再执行S502；或者，先执行S502，再执行S501。
S503，第一UE向网络设备发送第一信道质量。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的信道质量。
本申请实施例中将第一UE的信道质量称为第一信道质量。第一信道质量例如为信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)、参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)、或信道矩阵进行表示。
示例性的，第一UE根据第一下行参考信号S1，确定第一UE的第一信道质量，网络设备可以从第一UE接收第一UE的第一信道质量。
在另一种可能的实施例中，第一UE可向网络设备发送第一上行参考信号S3，相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第一上行参考信号S3，并根据第一上行参考信号S3，确定第一UE的信道矩阵，该信道矩阵可视为上行信道质量的一种示例。
S504，第二UE向网络设备发送第二信道质量。相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第二信道质量。
本申请实施例中将第二UE的信道质量称为第二信道质量。第二信道质量的表示方式可参照前文第一信道质量的内容，以及第二UE确定第二信道质量的方式可参照前文第一 UE确定第一信道质量的内容。
在另一种可能的实施例中，第二UE可向网络设备发送第二上行参考信号S4，相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第二上行参考信号S4，并根据第二上行参考信号S4，确定第二UE的信道矩阵，该信道矩阵可视为上行信道质量的一种示例。
S505，网络设备确定第一功率控制参数和第二功率控制参数。
第一功率控制参数为第一UE的功率控制参数，第一功率控制参数用于指示第一UE发送第一上行信号(如上行参考信号)的功率。第二功率控制参数为第二UE的功率控制参数，第二功率控制参数用于指示第二UE发送第一上行信号(如上行参考信号)的功率。
其中，第一功率控制参数可包括第一期望功率和/或第一功率差值。第一期望功率是指网络设备期望第一UE发送第一上行信号的功率，或者网络设备期望接收的第一UE发送的第一上行信号的功率。第一功率差值是指第一UE发送两次第一上行信号的功率差值。第二功率控制参数可包括第二期望功率和/或第二功率差值。第二期望功率是指网络设备期望第二UE发送第一上行信号的功率，或者网络设备期望接收的第二UE发送的第一上行信号的功率。第二功率差值是指第二UE发送两次第一上行信号的功率差值。
需要说明的是，第一期望功率和第二期望功率可以相同或不同，第一功率差值和第二功率差值也可以相同或不同。
作为一个示例，网络设备可根据第一信道质量和第二信道质量，确定第一功率控制参数和第二功率控制参数。
示例性的，网络设备根据第一信道质量和第二信道质量的相对大小，确定第一功率控制参数和第二功率控制参数。例如，网络设备确定第一信道质量高于第二信道质量(例如第一UE的CQI大于第二UE的CQI，或者例如，第一UE的RSRP大于第二UE的RSRP)，则确定第一期望功率比第二期望功率更小。
作为另一个示例，网络设备可根据第一UE对第一下行参考信号S1的第一应答信息，确定第一功率控制参数。第一应答信息用于表示第一UE成功接收第一下行参考信号S1或未成功接收第一下行参考信号S1，第一应答信息例如表示混合式自动重发(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)的否定应答(NACK)或肯定应答(ACK)。例如，网络设备确定第一UE的第一应答信息表示NACK，则网络设备确定将第一功率差值调大预设值；或者，网络设备确定第一UE的第一应答信息表示ACK，则网络设备确定将第一功率差值调小预设值。预设值可被预配置在网络设备中。
同理，网络设备可根据第二UE对第二下行参考信号S2的第二应答信息，确定第二功率控制参数。其中，第二应答信息的含义可参照前文第一应答信息的含义，网络设备根据第二应答信息，确定第二功率控制参数的方式也可参照前文网络设备根据第一应答信息，确定第二功率控制参数的内容。
需要说明的是，在图5所示的实施例中是以确定多个UE中的全部UE的功率控制参数(第一功率控制参数和第二功率控制参数)为例进行介绍。在实际情况下，网络设备可确定这多个UE中的部分UE的功率控制参数，例如，网络设备只确定第一UE的第一功率控制参数，或者网络设备只确定第二UE的第二功率控制参数。
S506，网络设备向第一UE发送信息1。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的信息1。信息1用于指示第一功率控制参数。信息1又可以称为第一信息。
S507，网络设备向第二UE发送信息2。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的信息2。 信息2用于指示第二功率控制参数。信息2又可以称为第四信息。
其中，S505和S506的执行顺序可以是任意的，例如，同时执行S506和S507；或者，先执行S506，再执行S507；或者，先执行S507，再执行S506。
作为一个示例，第一UE和第二UE可被预配置有发送上行参考信号的功率，这种情况下，无需网络设备确定第一功率控制参数和第二功率控制参数，即可无需执行S501-S507，即S501-S507是可选的步骤。
S508，网络设备发送信息3。相应的，第一UE和第二UE接收来自网络设备的信息3。信息3用于指示第一资源。信息3又可以称为第五信息。
网络设备发送信息3的方式、第一资源的含义可参照前文图2论述的内容，此处不再赘述。其中，网络设备采用单播的方式向第一UE和第二发送信息3的情况下，S508包括S508a和S508b，其中，S508a为网络设备向第一UE发送信息3，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的信息3；其中，S508b为网络设备向第二UE发送信息3，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的信息3。
S509，第一UE向网络设备发送第一上行参考信号序列S5。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第一上行参考信号序列S5。本申请实施例中的上行参考信号序列S5即为上述第一上行信号U1的一种示例。
例如，第一UE在资源1上发送第一上行信号序列S5。其中，一个上行参考信号序列可视为一个或多个上行参考信号，一个上行参考信号序列中的一个或多个上行参考信号可占用同一个时域资源，占用不同的频域资源。
例如，资源1可包括多个RE，其中每个RE对应一个索引(index)值，第一上行参考信号序列S5可以在频域上占用这多个RE中的至少一个RE。
作为一个示例，第一上行参考信号序列S5在每个RE上的相位可以是根据第一跳变方式对该第一上行参考信号序列S5在所述每个RE的第一预设相位进行跳变得到的。可以进一步理解为，按照第一跳变方式，对第一上行参考信号序列S5在不同RE上的相位进行了跳变。换言之，第一上行参考信号序列S5在任意两个RE上的相位的跳变方式均是第一跳变方式。
其中，跳变方式可理解为定义了该第一上行参考信号序列S5在每个RE上的第一预设相位的跳变规律，跳变具体例如在该第一上行参考信号序列S5在每个RE的第一预设相位的基础上增加一个相位，或者在第一预设相位的基础上减去一个相位。其中，该第一跳变方式均可以是网络设备为第一UE配置的，或者由协议配置在第一UE中的。
在该示例中，对第一上行参考信号序列S5在不同RE上的相位进行跳变，使得第一UE发送第一上行参考信号序列S5在不同RE上的相位呈现一定的可变性。如此，网络设备接收到的第一上行参考信号序列S5在不同RE上的相位也呈现一定的可变性。
作为一个示例，该第一上行参考信号序列S5在任意两个RE上的第一预设相位可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。第一UE发送的第一上行参考信号序列S5在任意两个RE上的相位(相当于跳变后的相位)可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。
在一种可能的实施方式中，在第一UE接收来自网络设备的信息1的情况下，第一UE可根据信息1指示的第一功率控制参数确定发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率。并按照确定出的发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率，发送第一上行参考信号序列S5。
例如，第一功率控制参数指示了第一期望功率，那么第一UE可根据第一期望功率确 定发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率。示例性的，第一期望功率是指网络设备期望第一UE发送第一上行信号的功率的情况下，第一UE可以将第一期望功率直接确定为发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率。
又例如，第一期望功率是指网络设备期望接收的第一UE发送的第一上行信号的功率的情况下，第一UE可以根据第一期望功率，以及衰落值(包括大尺度衰落值和/或小尺度衰落值)，确定发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率，例如，发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率为第一期望功率与衰落值的和。其中，大尺度衰落值是指因障碍物造成的信号损失的功率，小尺度衰落值是指因网络设备与第一UE之间的相对移动造成的信号损失的功率。
又例如，第一功率控制参数指示了第一功率差值，那么第一UE可根据上一次发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率，以及第一功率差值确定发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率。
又例如，第一功率控制参数指示了期望功率和功率差值的情况下，第一UE可选择期望功率和功率差值中的其中的一个确定第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率。
S510，第二UE向网络设备发送第二上行参考信号序列S6。相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第二上行参考信号序列S6。本申请实施例中的第二上行参考信号序列S6即为上述第二UE发送的第二上行信号U2的一种示例。
可选的，第一上行参考信号序列S5和第二UE向第二上行参考信号序列S6占用的时域资源和频域资源均可以是相同的。例如，第一UE在资源1上向网络设备发送第一上行参考信号序列S6，第二UE在资源1上向网络设备发送第二上行参考信号序列S6。资源1可视为图2所示的实施例中的第一资源的一种示例。
作为一个示例，第二UE发送的第二上行参考信号序列S6在每个RE上的相位可以是根据第二跳变方式对该第二上行参考信号序列S6在所述每RE上的第二预设相位进行跳变得到的。可以进一步理解为，按照第二跳变方式，对第二上行参考信号序列S6在不同RE上的相位进行了跳变。换言之，第二上行参考信号序列S6在任意两个RE上的相位的跳变方式均是第二跳变方式。其中，第一跳变方式和第二跳变方式可不同。
需要说明的是，该第二上行参考信号序列S6在任意两个RE上的第二预设相位可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。第二UE发送的第二上行参考信号序列S6在任意两个RE上的相位(相当于跳变后的相位)可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。
作为一个示例，在第二UE接收了信息2的情况下，第二UE可根据信息2指示的第二功率控制参数，确定第二UE发送第二上行参考信号序列S6的功率。其中，第二UE根据第二功率控制参数确定发送第二上行参考信号序列S6的功率的方式可参照前文第一UE根据第一功率控制参数确定发送第一上行参考信号序列S5的功率的内容，此处不再列举。
如果第一UE在资源1上发送第一上行参考信号序列S5、以及第二UE在资源1上发送第二上行参考信号序列S6占用的时域资源和频域资源相同，那么第一上行参考信号序列S5和第二上行参考信号序列S6可在资源1上叠加，为了便于区分，本申请实施例中将该叠加结果称为第五参考信号序列。该第五参考信号序列即为前文的第三上行信号U3的一种示例。
S511，第一UE向网络设备发送第三上行参考信号序列S7。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第三上行参考信号序列S7。本申请实施例中的第三上行参考信号序列S7即 为上述第一UE发送的第一上行信号U1的一种示例。
例如，第一UE在资源2上向网络设备发送第三上行参考信号序列S7。例如，资源2可包括多个RE，其中每个RE对应一个索引值，该第三上行参考信号序列S7可占用了这多个RE中的至少一个RE。
其中，第一上行参考信号序列S5和第三上行参考信号序列S7占用的资源是不同的，所述资源用于指示时域资源、频域资源和码域资源中的一种或多种。
例如，第一上行参考信号序列S5占用第g个时隙或第g个帧对应的部分或全部资源。第三上行参考信号序列S7占用第s个时隙或第s个帧对应的部分或全部资源。其中，某个信号序列占用某个时隙对应的资源可包括该信号序列占用的该时隙上的时域资源，与该信号序列占用的该时隙上的时域资源所对应的频域资源，以及与该信号序列占用的该时隙上的时域资源所对应的码域资源中的一种或多种。同理，某个信号序列占用某个帧对应的资源可包括该信号序列占用的该帧上的时域资源，与该信号序列占用的该帧上的时域资源所对应的频域资源，与该信号序列占用的该帧上的时域资源所对应的码域资源中的一种或多种。
其中，g和s可以相同或不同。其中，第一上行参考信号序列S5占用的资源在第g个时隙或第g个帧对应的相对位置，与第三上行参考信号序列S7占用的资源在第s个时隙或第s个帧对应的相对位置可以是相同或不同的。相对位置例如为正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)索引、梳齿索引或循环移位(cyclic shift，CS)索引。
作为一个示例，第三上行参考信号序列S7在每个RE上的相位可以是根据所述第一跳变方式对该第三上行参考信号序列S7在所述每个RE上的第三预设相位进行跳变得到的。可以进一步理解为，按照第一跳变方式，对第三上行参考信号序列S7在不同RE上的相位进行跳变。换言之，第三上行参考信号序列S7在任意两个RE上的相位的跳变方式均是第一跳变方式。第一跳变方式的含义可参照前文。
需要说明的是，该第三上行参考信号序列S7在任意两个RE上的第三预设相位可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。第三上行参考信号序列S7在任意两个RE上的相位(相当于跳变后的相位)可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。
作为一个示例，第一上行参考信号序列S5和第三上行参考信号序列S7在同一个索引值的RE上的相位差不为2nπ，n为整数。并且，第一上行参考信号序列S5在第一索引值和第二索引值的RE上的相位差与第三上行参考信号序列S7在第一索引值和第二索引值的RE上的相位差之间的差值为2mπ，m为整数。
例如，第一上行参考信号序列S5在RE1上的相位与第三上行参考信号序列S7在RE1上的相位相差不为0、-2π和2π等；第一上行参考信号序列S5在RE1和RE2上的相位差，与第三上行参考信号序列S7在RE1和RE2上的相位差之间的差值为0。其中，RE1表示索引值为1的RE，RE2表示索引值为2的RE。
作为一个示例，第一UE也可仅发送第一上行参考信号序列S6，即无需执行S511的步骤，即S511为可选的步骤。
S512，第二UE向网络设备发送第四上行参考信号序列S8。相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第四上行参考信号序列S8。本申请实施例中的第四行参考信号序列S8即为上述第二UE发送的第二上行信号U2的一种示例。
其中，第二上行参考信号序列S6和第四上行参考信号序列S8占用的资源是不同的，所述资源用于指示时域资源、频域资源和码域资源中的一种或多种。
可选的，第三上行参考信号序列S7和第四上行参考信号序列S8占用的资源可以是相同的，所述资源用于指示时域资源、频域资源和码域资源中的一种或多种。例如，第一UE在资源2上向网络设备发送第三上行参考信号序列S7，第二UE在资源2上向网络设备发送第四上行参考信号序列S8。资源2可视为前文图2所示的实施例中的第一资源的一种示例。
作为一个示例，第二UE发送的第四上行参考信号序列S8在每个资源元素上的相位可以是根据第二跳变方式对该第四上行参考信号序列S8在所述每个资源元素的第四预设相位进行跳变得到的。可以进一步理解为，按照第二跳变方式，对第四上行参考信号序列S8在不同RE上的相位进行了跳变。换言之，第四上行参考信号序列S8在任意两个RE上的相位的跳变方式均是第二跳变方式。第二跳变方式的含义可参照前文。
需要说明的是，该第四上行参考信号序列S8在任意两个RE上的第四预设相位可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。第四上行参考信号序列S8在任意两个RE上的相位(相当于跳变后的相位)可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。
作为一个示例，第二上行参考信号序列S6和第四上行参考信号序列S8在同一个索引值的资源元素上的相位差不为2nπ。并且，第二上行参考信号序列S6在第一索引值和第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差与第四上行参考信号序列S8在第一索引值和第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差之间的差值为2mπ。其中，n和m均为整数，n和m的取值例如为0、-1、1和2等。
例如，第二上行参考信号序列S6在RE1上的相位与第四上行参考信号序列S8在RE1上的相位之差为π。第二上行参考信号序列S6在RE1和RE2上的相位差，与第四上行参考信号序列S8在RE1和RE2上的相位差之间的差值为2π。
例如，请参照图6，为第一UE和第二UE分别发送上行参考信号序列的一种示例图。如图6所示，第一UE在第一个周期内发送的第一上行参考信号序列S5在RE1和RE2上的相位分别为θ1和θ2；第二UE在第一个周期内发送第二上行参考序列S6在RE1和RE2上的相位分别为θ3和θ4；第一UE在第二个周期内发送第三上行参考信号序列S7在RE1和RE2上的相位分别为θ5和θ6；第二UE在第二个周期内发送第四上行参考信号序列S8在RE1和RE2上的相位分别为θ7和θ8。其中，θ1和θ5之差不为2nπ，且θ2和θ6之差不为2nπ，θ3和θ7之差不为2nπ，θ4和θ8之差不为2nπ。另外，θ1和θ2之间的相位差等于θ3和θ4之间的相位差；θ5和θ6之间的相位差等于θ7和θ8之间的相位差。
如果第一UE在资源2上发送第三上行参考信号序列S7、以及第二UE在资源2发送第四上行参考信号序列S8，那么因此第三上行参考信号序列S7和第四上行参考信号序列S8可在资源2处叠加，为了便于区分，本申请实施例将该叠加结果称为第六参考信号序列。该第六参考信号序列为即为前文的第三上行信号U3的一种示例。
作为一个示例，第二UE也可仅发送第二上行参考信号序列S6，即无需执行S512的步骤，即S512为可选的步骤。
S513，网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵。
示例性的，网络设备可根据第一上行参考信号序列S5和第二上行参考信号序列S6，或者，网络设备可根据第三上行参考信号序列S7和第四上行参考信号序列S8，或者，根 据第一上行参考信号序列S5、第二上行参考信号序列S6、第三上行参考信号序列S7和第四上行参考信号序列S8，确定第一上行信道矩阵，进而根据第一上行信道矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。
例如，网络设备可根据第五参考信号序列和/或第六参考信号序列，确定第一上行信道矩阵，并根据第一上行信道矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。例如，网络设备对第一上行信道矩阵进行奇异值或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。又例如，网络设备对第一上行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值或特征值分解，获得下行预编码矩阵。
在网络设备采用第一上行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵的情况下，第一上行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵可以根据第一上行信道矩阵的转置矩阵与上行参考信号序列的相位确定的。而由于本申请实施例中的上行信号序列(如第一上行参考信号序列S5、第二上行参考信号序列S6、第三上行参考信号序列S7和第四上行参考信号序列S8)的相位呈现一定的可变性，因此网络设备利用上行信号序列确定的第一上行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵也呈现一定的可变性，使得确定的第一上行信号的协方差矩阵的容错性更好，也就有利于提高确定的下行预编码矩阵的准确性。
S514，网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
其中，第一数据的含义、网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据的方式、以及第一UE处理第一数据的内容可参照前文论述的内容，此处不再列举。
S515，网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
其中，第一数据的含义、网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据的方式、以及第二UE处理第一数据的内容可参照前文论述的内容，此处不再列举。
S516，第一UE向网络设备发送第三应答信息。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第三应答信息。
例如，第三应答信息用于指示多个UE中的一个UE(如第二UE)是否已成功接收第一数据。第二UE成功接收第一数据可理解为该UE接收第一数据，并成功解码第一数据。第二UE未成功接收第一数据可理解为该UE没有成功解码第一数据。
例如，该第三应答信息具体例如用于指示NACK或ACK。例如，第三应答信息可占1比特(bit)，该1比特的取值为1，表示NACK；该1比特的取值为0，表示ACK。
又例如，第三应答信息用于指示第一UE和第二UE是否均成功接收第一数据。该第一应答信息具体例如用于指示HARQ中的否定应答或肯定应答，其中，NACK用于表示第二UE和第一UE中的至少一个UE没有成功接收第一数据。ACK用于表示第二UE和第一UE均成功接收第一数据。
作为一个示例，网络设备可指定第一UE和第二UE中的一个UE发送该第三应答信息。在本申请实施例中，以网络设备指定第一UE发送第三应答信息为例。在这种示例下，第一UE可以是接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，确定第一UE需向网络设备发送第三应答信息。该第二指示信息用于指示第一UE发送该第三应答信息。作为另一个示例，第一UE和第二UE可协商确定由其中的一个UE发送该第三应答信息。在本申请实施例中是以第一UE发送该第三应答信息为例。
当第三应答信息的具体含义不同时，第一UE确定第三应答信息的方式也有区别，下 面分别说明。
1、第三应答信息用于指示多个UE中的一个UE(如第二UE)是否已成功接收第一数据。
在本申请实施例中是以第三应答信息指示第二UE是否已成功接收第一数据为例。
例如，第二UE为多个UE中信道质量小于或等于第一阈值的UE，或者，第二UE为多个UE中信道质量小于或等于第一阈值的UE。上行信道质量的具体内容可参照前文论述的内容。信道质量具体可以为上行信道质量或下行信道质量。上行信道质量的内容可参照上行信道质量的内容，以及下行信道质量的确定方式可参照上行信道质量的确定方式。
示例性的，上述的第二指示信息还用于指示多个UE中信道质量(如上行信道质量或下行信道质量)小于或等于第一阈值的UE为第二UE。如此，第一UE在接收第二指示信息之后，便可确定具体反馈哪个UE的应答信息。或者，多个UE中的其他UE可将其信道质量(如上行信道质量或下行信道质量)反馈给第一UE，这样第一UE可从这多个UE中确定上行信道质量小于或等于第一阈值的UE(即第二UE)，并确定反馈第二UE对应的应答信息。
或者，网络设备向第二UE发送第三指示信息，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。第三指示信息用于指示第二UE的信道质量小于或等于第一阈值，进而第二UE可向第一UE发送第二UE的应答信息。为了便于区分，这里将第二UE的应答信息称为第四应答信息。
由于第二UE为多个UE中上行信道质量较差的UE，如果第二UE成功接收了第一数据，那么表示第一UE和第二UE均成功接收第一数据的可能性较大。因此，在第三应答信息表示第二UE成功接收了第一数据的情况下，网络设备可确定这多个UE均成功接收了第一数据。在第三应答信息表示第二UE未成功接收第一数据的情况下，网络设备可向第二UE单独重发该第一数据，这种情况下，网络设备可采用单播的方式向第二UE重发第一数据。或者，在第三应答信息表示第二UE未成功接收第一数据的情况下，网络设备可向这多个UE均重发第一数据，这种情况下，网络设备可采用单播的方式或组播的方式重发第一数据。
在本申请实施例中，第一UE只需反馈一个UE所对应的应答信息，无需反馈多个UE中每个UE对应的应答信息，有利于减少第一UE反馈的第一应答信息所占用的比特数，也就减少了第一UE和网络设备之间的数据交互量。
2、第三应答信息用于指示第一UE和第二UE是否均成功接收第一数据。
第一UE可确定第一UE是否成功接收第一数据，生成第一UE的应答信息，为了便于区分，这里将第一UE的应答信息称为第五应答信息。第一UE可从第二UE获取第二UE的应答信息(第二UE的应答信息可称为第四应答信息)。
作为一个示例，第一UE可将第四应答信息和第五应答信息可作为第三应答信息发送给网络设备。换言之，第三应答信息包括了第四应答信息和第五应答信息。网络设备接收第一应答信息之后，可以确定第一UE和第二UE是否均成功接收第一数据。如果第一UE和第二UE中的一个或两个UE没有成功接收第一数据，则网络设备可向未成功接收的UE重发第一数据。
作为另一个示例，第一UE可对第四应答信息和第五应答信息进行逻辑和运算，生成第三应答信息，并将该第三应答信息发送给网络设备。这种情况下，第三应答信息可仅占 一个比特。例如，第四应答信息的取值为1，第五应答信息的取值为1，则第一UE确定第三应答信息的取值为1。
在该示例中，网络设备如果确定该第三应答信息指示这多个UE未成功接收第一数据，则网络设备向多个UE重发第一数据，网络设备可采用单播的方式或组播的方式重发第一数据。
作为一个示例，图5所示的实施例中是以第一UE反馈第三应答信息为例，实际上也可以多个UE分别向网络设备反馈各自的应答信息，例如，第一UE向网络设备发送第五应答信息，第二UE向网络设备发送第四应答信息。这种情况下，无需执行S513，即S513为可选的步骤。
在图5所示的实施例中，多个UE可在同一个资源上向网络设备发送上行参考信号，网络设备可根据来自多个UE的上行参考信号，确定一个下行预编码矩阵。如此，网络设备不必为每个UE单独确定下行预编码矩阵，简化了网络设备的计算下行预编码矩阵的计算过程以及计算开销。并且，多个UE共享一个下行预编码矩阵，有利于节省下行预编码矩阵的开销。并且，网络设备还可根据多个UE的上行信道情况，灵活确定多个UE发送上行参考信号序列的功率，以保证多个UE顺利发送上行参考信号序列。另外，多个UE向网络设备发送上行参考信号序列时，可对上行参考信号序列的相位进行跳变处理，使得网络设备接收到的多个UE中的任意两个UE的上行参考信号序列的相位差是可变的，有利于网络设备确定出更具有容错性的下行预编码矩阵，有利于提高下行预编码矩阵的准确性。另外，在网络设备采用下行预编码矩阵，向多个UE发送第一数据之后，多个UE中的一个UE可向网络设备上报一个应答信息，而不必多个UE中的每个UE均向网络设备上报应答信息，有利于减少网络设备与UE之间的交互次数。
请参照图7，为该通信方法的一种流程示意图。在图7所示的实施例中是以图2所示的实施例中的第一上行信号U1和第二上行信号U2为第二种可能实现方式中的模拟信号为例进行介绍。
S701，第一UE向网络设备发送第一上行参考信号S1。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第一上行参考信号S1。第一上行参考信号S1例如为SRS。
S702，第二UE向网络设备发送第二上行参考信号S2。相应的，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第二上行参考信号S2。第二上行参考信号S2例如为SRS。
S703，网络设备确定M个位置。
其中，M个位置为第一UE对应的第一矩阵与第二UE对应的第一矩阵中相同的M个位置。
由于任意一个UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，与该UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置是相同的。因此在本申请实施例中，网络设备可根据第一上行参考信号S1，确定第一UE的第二矩阵，以及根据第二上行参考信号S2，确定第二UE的第二矩阵。网络设备可根据第一UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置(为了简化描述，本申请实施例中将第一UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置称为第一位置集合)，以及第二UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置(为了简化描述，本申请实施例中将第二UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置称为第二位置集合)，确定所述M个位置。
作为一个示例，第一UE和第二UE均对应P个空间层，相应的，第一UE可对应P个第二矩阵，第二UE可对应P个第二矩阵。其中，第一UE对应的P个第二矩阵中的一 个第二矩阵与第一UE对应的P个空间层中的一个对应。第二UE对应的P个第二矩阵中的一个第二矩阵与第二UE对应的P个空间层中的一个对应。在这种情况下，网络设备可根据第一上行参考信号S1，确定第一UE的上行信道矩阵。网络设备根据第一UE的上行信道矩阵，确定第一UE的预编码矩阵，进而根据第一UE的预编码矩阵，确定第一UE的第二矩阵，也就确定了第一UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，相当于确定了第一位置集合。例如，网络设备对第一UE的上行信道矩阵进行特征值分解或SVD，或者对第一UE的上行信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值或SVD，从而获得第一UE的第二矩阵。
同理，网络设备也可根据上行参考信号S2，确定第二UE的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，相当于确定了第二位置集合。
例如，网络设备可以将第一位置集合与第二位置集合的并集确定为所述M个位置。或者，网络设备可以将第一位置集合与第二位置集合的交集确定为所述M个位置。
可选的，第一位置集合可以是第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二位置集合可以是第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置。这种情况下，网络设备相当于是根据第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的。K为小于或等于P的正整数，P为正整数。
这种情况下确定的M个位置可以理解为与第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵对应，以及与第二UE在P个空间层上的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵对应。
作为另一个示例，第一UE在P个空间层中任意两个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置均相同，以及第二UE在P个空间层中任意两个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置。这种情况下，第一位置集合可为第一UE对应的P个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，第二位置集合可以理解为第一UE对应的P个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置。其中，一个第二矩阵对应一个空间层。
这种情况下，M个位置相当于是根据第一UE在P个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的。这种情况下确定的M个位置可以理解为与第一UE对应的P个第一矩阵对应，以及与第二UE对应的P个第一矩阵对应。
例如，第一位置集合为第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，第二位置集合为第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置，第一位置集合包括(1，1)、(1，2)和(3，1)。其中，(1，1)表示第一UE的第二矩阵中的第1行第1个；(1，2)表示第一UE的第二矩阵中的第1行第2个；(3，1)表示第一UE的第二矩阵中的第3行第1个。第二位置集合包括(1，2)、(1，3)和(3，1)。其中，(1，2)表示第二UE的第二矩阵中的第1行第2个；(1，3)表示一个元素的位置为第二UE的第二矩阵中的第1行第3个；(3，1)表示第二UE的第二矩阵中的第3行第1个。
网络设备可将第一位置集合和第二位置集合的交集确定为M个位置(即M个位置包括(1，2)和(3，1))。或者，网络设备第一位置集合和第二位置集合的并集确定为M个位置(即M个位置包括(1，1)、(1，2)、(1，3)和(3，1))。
作为另一个示例，第一UE包括R个天线(或天线端口)，第一UE也就对应R个第 二矩阵。第二UE包括T个天线(或天线端口)，第二UE也就对应T个第二矩阵。T和R的取值可参照前文。这种情况下，网络设备可根据第一上行参考信号S1，确定第一UE的上行信道矩阵。网络设备根据第一UE的上行信道矩阵，确定与该上行信道矩阵对应的至少一个频域向量，以及确定与该上行信道矩阵对应的至少一个空域向量，从而根据至少一个频域向量(这至少一个频域向量构成频域矩阵)和至少一个空域向量(这至少一个空域向量构成空域矩阵)，确定一个天线(或天线端口)上的空频合并系数矩阵，称为第二矩阵。同理，网络设备可确定第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第二矩阵。这种情况下，M个位置可以是根据第一UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第二矩阵的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第二矩阵的非零元素的位置确定的。
例如，所述M个位置为第一UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第二矩阵的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第二矩阵的非零元素的位置的交集或并集。
需要说明的是，S701-S703为网络设备确定M个位置的一种方式，实际上网络设备确定M个位置的方式还有多种，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
S704，网络设备向第一UE发送第一指示信息。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。第一指示信息用于指示M个位置。
其中，第一指示信息可隐式指示M个位置，或者显式指示M个位置。
S705，网络设备向第二UE发送第一指示信息。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。第一指示信息的含义可参照前文论述的内容。
需要说明的是，S701-S705为第一UE和第二UE获得M个位置的一种方式，实际上第一UE和第二UE获得M个位置的方式还有多种，当第一UE和第二UE采用其它方式获得M个位置时，可无需执行S701-S705，即S701-S705为可选的步骤。
S706，网络设备向第一UE发送第一下行参考信号S3。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一下行参考信号S3。第一下行参考信号S3例如为CSI-RS。
S707，网络设备向第二UE发送第二下行参考信号S4。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第二下行参考信号S4。第二下行参考信号S4例如为CSI-RS。
S708，网络设备发送信息3。相应的，多个UE接收信息3。信息3用于指示第一资源。信息3又可以称为第五信息。
其中，信息3和第一资源的内容可参照前文。
网络设备可采用组播或单播的方式向多个UE发送信息3。当网络设备采用组播的方式向多个UE发送信息3时，S708可包括S708a和S708b，其中，S708a为网络设备向第一UE发送信息3，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的信息3；S708b为网络设备向第二UE发送信息3，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的信息3。
S709，第一UE在第一资源上向网络设备发送第一模拟信号A1。相应的，网络设备在第一资源上接收来自第一UE的第一模拟信号A1。本申请实施例中的第一模拟信号A1即为第一UE发送的第一上行信号U1的一种示例。
其中，第一模拟信号A1用于指示第一UE的第一矩阵中的M个元素。这M个元素为第一UE的第一矩阵中的所述M个位置上的M个元素。
示例性的，第一UE根据第一下行参考信号S3，确定第一UE的第一矩阵，其中，第一UE确定第一UE的第一矩阵的方式可参照前文网络设备根据上行参考信号确定第一UE 的第二矩阵的内容，此处不再列举。
在第一UE向网络设备发送第一模拟信号A1之前，第一UE可获得M个位置，下面对第一UE确定M个位置的方式进行介绍。
方式一，如前文S704所示，第一UE可从网络设备接收第一指示信息，相当于第一UE获得了M个位置。
方式二，第一UE可自行确定M个位置。
具体的，第一UE确定第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，为了简化描述，本申请实施例中将第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置称为第三位置集合。第一UE可以从第二UE接收第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，为了简化描述，本申请实施例中将第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置称为第四位置集合。第一UE根据第三位置集合和第四位置集合，从而确定M个位置。其中，第二UE确定第二UE的第一矩阵的方式可参照前文网络设备根据上行参考信号确定第一UE的第二矩阵的内容，此处不再列举。
例如，网络设备可以将第三位置集合与第四位置集合的并集确定为M个位置。或者，网络设备可以将第三位置集合与第四位置集合的交集确定为M个位置。
在第一UE和第二UE均对应P个空间层时，第一UE对应P个第一矩阵，其中第一UE的一个第一矩阵对应P个空间层中的一个，以及从第二UE对应P个第一矩阵，其中第二UE的一个第一矩阵对应P个空间层中的一个。
作为一个示例，第三位置集合可以是第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，相应的，第四位置集合可以是第二UE在P个空间层中的在第K个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置。这种情况下，第一UE可分别确定P组M个位置，其中一组M个位置是根据第一UE在P个空间层中的一个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的一个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素确定的。
作为另一个示例，在第一UE的P个第一矩阵中任一两个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置相同，以及第二UE的P个第一矩阵中任一两个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置相同的情况下，第三位置集合可以为第一UE的P个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，第四位置集合可以为第二UE的P个第一矩阵中的非零元素。这种情况下，网络设备可确定一个M个位置，这M个位置是根据第一UE在P个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的。
作为另一个示例，第三位置集合可以是第一UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，相应的，第四位置集合可以是第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置。这种情况下，网络设备可以根据第一UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定所述M个位置。
方式三，第一UE可被预配置有M个位置。例如，第一UE可被协议配置有M个位置。
在第一UE自行确定M个位置的情况下，那么第一UE还可向第二UE发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，也可以是第二UE确定M个位置，第二UE确定M个位置的方式可参照第一UE确定M个位置的方式。这种情况下，第二UE可向第一UE发送第一指示信息，以指示M个位置，相当于第一UE获得了M个位置。
S710，第二UE在第一资源上向网络设备发送第二模拟信号A2。相应的，网络设备在第一资源上接收来自第二UE的第二模拟信号A2。本申请实施例中的第二模拟信号A2即为第二UE发送的第二上行信号U2的一种示例。
其中，第二模拟信号A2用于指示第二UE的第一矩阵中的M个元素。这M个元素为第二UE的第一矩阵中的所述M个位置上对应的M个元素。
作为一个示例，第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2均是在第一资源上发送的，因此第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2可在第一资源处叠加，本申请实施例中将第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在第一资源处的叠加结果称为第三模拟信号A3，其中，其中，第三模拟信号A3包括第三叠加结果、第四叠加结果和第五叠加结果中的一种或多种。第三叠加结果为第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在频域或时域上的叠加结果。第二叠加结果为第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在天线域或波束上的叠加结果。第三叠加结果为第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在码域上的叠加结果。可选的，第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在频域、时域、天线域、波束域或码域均可分别表示为复数形式，这种情况下，第三模拟信号A3可视为两个复数之和。第三模拟信号A3相当于前文第三上行信号U3的一种示例，这种情况下，相当于网络设备接收了第三模拟信号A3。
可选的，第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2在频域、时域、天线域、波束域或码域均可分别表示为复数形式(具体例如为复数向量或复数矩阵)，这种情况下，第三模拟信号A3可视为两个复数之和。如果第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2为复数向量，那么第三模拟信号A3对应为复数向量。如果第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2为复数矩阵，那么第三模拟信号A3对应为复数矩阵。
S711，第一UE向网络设备发送第一指示信息。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第一指示信息。
在第一UE自行确定M个位置的情况下，第一UE可执行S711。
作为一个示例，在执行S701-S704的情况下，则无需执行S711，即S711为可选的步骤。或者，在执行S711的情况下，则无需执行S701-S704的步骤。
作为另一个示例，在第一UE采用上述方式三获得M个位置的情况下，无需执S701-S704和S711，即S701-S704和S711均为可选的步骤。
在M个位置为第三位置集合和第四位置集合的交集的情况下，或者M个位置为第一位置集合和第二位置集合的交集的情况下，网络设备即使接收到了第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2，可能也无法完全地获得第一UE和第二UE的第一矩阵中所有的非零元素的位置。因此在本申请实施例中，第一UE还可向网络设备发送第六信息，和/或，第二UE可向网络设备发送第七信息。可选的，第六信息和第七信息可为数字信号。
其中，第六信息用于指示第五位置集合，以及第五位置集合上的元素。同理，第七信息用于指示第六位置集合，以及第六位置集合上的元素。第五位置集合是指第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置除了所述M个位置之外的位置，第六位置集合是指第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置中除了所述M个位置之外的位置。
作为一个示例，在第一UE和第二UE均对应P个空间层，且在第一模拟信号A1指示第一UE在P个空间层中的第K空间层上的第一矩阵的M个元素，以及第二模拟信号A2指示第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的M个元素的情况下，第五位置集合可具体为第一UE的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中非零元素的位置中除了M个位置之外的位 置。同理，第六位置集合可具体为第二UE的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中非零元素的位置中除了M个位置之外的位置。
作为另一个示例，在第一UE对应R个天线(或天线端口)，第二UE对应T个天线(或天线端口)，且在第一模拟信号A1指示第一UE在R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)的第一矩阵的M个元素，以及第二模拟信号A2指示第二UE在R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)的第一矩阵的M个元素的情况下，第五位置集合可具体为第一UE在R个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)的第一矩阵的非零元素的位置中除了M个位置之外的位置。同理，第六位置集合可具体为第二UE在T个天线(或天线端口)中的一个天线(或天线端口)的第一矩阵的非零元素的位置中除了M个位置之外的位置。
S712，网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵。
作为一个示例，网络设备可根据第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2，确定下行预编码矩阵。其中，确定下行预编码矩阵的方式可参照前文图2论述的确定下行预编码矩阵的内容。
作为另一个示例，在网络设备接收来自第一UE的第六信息，和/或，网络设备接收来自第二UE的第七信息的情况下，网络设备可根据第一模拟信号A1和第二模拟信号A2，以及第六信息和/或第七信息，确定第三矩阵。这种情况下，第三矩阵中的M个位置上的元素分别为M个求和结果，并且，第三矩阵中的第五位置集合上的每个位置的元素对应为第六信息指示的元素，和/或第三矩阵中的第六位置集合上的每个位置的元素对应为第七信息指示的元素。在该示例中，网络设备能够获得信息更全面的第三矩阵，也有利于网络设备确定出准确性更高的下行预编码矩阵。
S713，网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据。相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据的方式、以及第一数据的内容可参照前文图2论述的内容，此处不再列举。
S714，网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据。相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据的方式可参照前文图2论述的内容，此处不再列举。
S715，第一UE向网络设备发送第三应答信息。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第三应答信息。
第一UE的确定方式、第三应答信息的含义、第一UE确定第三应答信息的方式、以及网络设备接收第三应答信息后的重发第一数据的方式均可参照前文图5论述的内容，此处不再列举。
作为一个示例，S715为可选的步骤。
在图7所示的实施例中，网络设备可根据多个UE发送的模拟信号，确定多个UE共享的一个下行预编码矩阵，由于多个UE均无需对第一矩阵中的M个位置上的元素进行量化，不仅减少了多个UE的处理量，也减少多个UE的量化第一矩阵中的M个位置上的元素过程所造成的信息量化损耗，如此有利于网络设备确定出更准确的下行预编码矩阵。并且，网络设备确定出的下行预编码矩阵是多个UE共享的，因此有利于降低下行预编码矩阵的开销。并且，网络设备不必为多个UE中的每个UE确定下行预编码矩阵，因此可简 化网络设备确定下行预编码矩阵的过程，且可以降低网络设备的计算开销。并且，多个UE均是在第一资源上发送模拟信号，有利于减少多个UE发送模拟信号的资源开销，且便于网络设备接收来自这多个UE的模拟信号。另外，多个UE只需上报各自的第一矩阵中的部分元素，而不必各自上报第一矩阵，因此可减少多个UE的上报的数据量，也就降低了多个UE上报所需的资源开销。
为了简化确定预编码矩阵的计算过程，本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，在该方法中，多个终端设备中的一个终端设备(如第一终端设备)可确定多个终端设备中的第一矩阵在M个求和结果，进而根据M个求和结果，确定预编码矩阵指示，网络设备可根据预编码矩阵指示确定下行预编码矩阵，简化了网络设备计算多个终端设备的下行预编码矩阵的过程，并且减少了网络设备的计算开销。并且，多个终端设备共享一个下行预编码矩阵，降低了多个终端设备的预编码矩阵的资源开销。另外，多个终端设备只需一个终端设备上报一个预编码矩阵指示，而不必多个终端设备分别上报各自的预编码矩阵，减少了多个终端设备上报预编码矩阵的开销。
请参照图8，为该方法的一种流程示意图。图8所示的实施例的方法可应用于图1所示的场景。图8所示的实施例多个UE包括第一UE和第二UE，第一UE和第二UE例如为图1所示的任一终端设备110，并且在图8所示的实施例的UE组也是以包括第一UE和第二UE为例进行介绍。图8所示的实施例所涉及的网络设备，例如为图1所示的网络设备120。
S801，网络设备发送下行参考信号。相应的，多个UE接收下行参考信号。下行参考信号例如为CSI-RS。
作为一个示例，网络设备可通过单播的方式分别向第一UE和第二UE发送下行参考信号。在单播的方式下，S801可包括S801a和S801b，其中，S801a为网络设备向第一UE发送第一下行参考信号S1，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一下行参考信号S1；S801b为网络设备向第二UE发送第二下行参考信号S2，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第二下行参考信号S2。
作为另一个示例，网络设备可通过组播的方式向UE组(本申请实施例中以UE组包括第一UE和第二UE为例)发送下行参考信号，组播方式发送下行参考信号的内容可参照前文论述的内容，此处不再列举。
S802，第二UE向第一UE发送信息4。相应的，第一UE接收来自第二UE的信息4。信息4用于指示第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素，以及第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置。信息4又可以称为第二信息。
第二UE可根据第二下行参考信号S2，确定第二UE的第一矩阵。其中，第二UE确定第一矩阵的方式可参照前文图7论述的内容，此处不再列举。第二UE可确定第一矩阵中的非零元素，以及非零元素的位置，向第一UE发送信息4。
同理，第一UE可确定第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置。
第一UE可根据第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，从而确定M个位置。例如，第一UE将第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置的并集确定为M个位置；或者，第一UE将第一UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置的交集确定为M个位置。相应的，第一UE也就获得第二UE中的第一矩 阵中的所述M个位置上的M个元素，以及第一UE的第一矩阵中的所述M个位置上的M个元素。
作为一个示例，在第一UE和第二UE均对应了P个空间层，第一UE和第二UE也就对应P个第一矩阵的情况下，第一UE可根据第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定所述M个位置。其中，所述M个位置例如为第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置的交集或并集。
作为另一个示例，在第一UE包括R个天线(或天线端口)，第一UE也就对应R个第一矩阵，以及第二UE包括T个天线(或天线端口)，第二UE也就对应T个第一矩阵的情况下，T和R的取值可参照前文论述的内容。第一UE可根据第一UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在一个天线(或天线端口)上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定所述M个位置。其中，所述M个位置例如为第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置的交集或并集。
S803，第二UE向第一UE发送信息5。相应的，第一UE接收来自第二UE的信息5。信息5用于指示第二UE的第一矩阵中的M个元素。这M个元素对应所述第二UE的第一矩阵中的M个位置。
在S803所示的实施例中，第一UE和第二UE可提前确定M个位置，第二UE可直接向第一UE反馈第二UE的第一矩阵在M个元素。这种情况下，M个位置可以是第一UE反馈给第二UE的，或者第二UE确定的，或者第一UE和第二UE从网络设备获得的。其中，网络设备确定M个位置、第一UE或第二UE确定M个位置的方式均可参照前文论述的内容。
需要说明的是，S802和S803为第一UE确定多个UE的M个元素的两种方式，在执行S802的情况下，可无需执行S803；或者，在执行S803的情况下，可无需执行S802。
S804，第一UE确定M个求和结果。
在第一UE获得第一UE的第一矩阵在所述M个位置上的元素，以及第二UE的第一矩阵在所述M个位置上的元素之后，可确定了M个求和结果。M个求和结果的含义以及确定M个求和结果的方式可参照前文论述的内容。
作为一个示例，在第一UE和第二UE均对应P个空间层，且所述M个位置对应第一UE的P个第一矩阵以及第二UE的P个第二矩阵的情况下，第一UE可按照上述方式确定P个空间中的每个空间层对应的M个求和结果。其中，所述M个位置对应第一UE的P个第一矩阵以及第二UE的P个第二矩阵的含义可参照前文论述的内容。
S805，第一UE向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的预编码矩阵指示。
第一UE可直接根据M个求和结果，确定预编码矩阵指示。
示例性的，第一UE可根据M个求和结果，确定第三矩阵。进而，第一UE可根据第三矩阵，确定预编码矩阵指示，并向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示。例如，第一UE可对第三矩阵进行量化，获得预编码矩阵指示。
作为一个示例，在第一UE可根据第一UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一 矩阵中的非零元素的位置，以及第二UE在P个空间层中的第K个空间层上的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定所述M个位置的情况下，第一UE根据M个求和结果确定的第三矩阵可视为一个空间层上的一个空频合并系数矩阵。
作为另一个示例，在第一UE包括R个天线(或天线端口)，以及第二UE包括T个天线(或天线端口)，第一UE根据M个求和结果确定的第三矩阵可视为一个天线(或天线端口)上的一个空频合并系数矩阵。
相应的，网络设备获得预编码矩阵指示之后，可获得第三矩阵，进而可根据第三矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵。其中，网络设备根据第三矩阵确定下行预编码矩阵的内容可参照前文图2中论述的内容。
S806，网络设备发送第一数据。相应的，多个UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
其中，第一数据的含义、以及网络设备发送第一数据的方式也可参照前文。
网络设备接收预编码矩阵指示后，可确定第三矩阵，进而根据第三矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵，并采用该下行预编码矩阵对待发送的数据进行预编码，从而获得第一数据。其中，网络设备根据第三矩阵，确定下行预编码矩阵的内容可参照前文论述的内容。
网络设备采用单播的方式向多个UE发送第一数据的情况下，S806包括S806a和S806b，其中，S806a为网络设备向第一UE发送第一数据，相应的，第一UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据；S806b为网络设备向第二UE发送第一数据，相应的，第二UE接收来自网络设备的第一数据。
当然，网络设备可采用组播的方式向多个UE发送第一数据。组播的具体内容可参照前文，此处不再列举。
S807，第一UE向网络设备发送第三应答信息。相应的，网络设备接收来自第一UE的第三应答信息。
其中，第三应答信息的含义、第一UE确定第三应答信息的方式、第一UE的确定方式、以及网络设备接收到第三应答信息后的重发第一数据的内容均可参照前文图5论述的内容，此处不再列举。
在图8所示的实施例中，可直接由多个UE中的一个UE(如第一UE)根据M个求和结果，确定下行预编码矩阵，进而确定预编码矩阵指示，并向网络设备反馈预编码矩阵指示，使得网络设备可根据第一下行预编码指示确定预编码矩阵，这种方式中，无需网络设备自行计算下行预编码矩阵，减少了网络设备的计算量。并且，下行预编码矩阵是多个UE共享的，减少了对预编码矩阵的消耗。并且，在图8所示的实施例中，第一UE只需向网络设备反馈预编码矩阵指示，网络设备便可确定多个UE的下行预编码矩阵，而不必每个UE均向网络设备上报预编码矩阵，减少了上报预编码矩阵所需的资源开销。
需要说明的是，本申请的各个实施例(如图2、图5、图7或图8所示的实施例)中是以多个UE包括2个UE为例进行说明，实际上多个UE的数量可以是2个或2个以上，当多个UE包括2个以上的UE时，执行上述通信方法的过程与前文执行通信方法的过程类似，此处不再列举。
请参照图9，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。如图9所示，通信装置900包括收发模块901和处理模块902。收发模块901和处理模块902可耦合设置。
在第一实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文网络设备的功能，例如图2、图5或图7中的网络设备的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于执行S202中接收来自多个UE的上行信号；处理模块902用于执行S203的步骤。
又例如，收发模块901用于接收来自第一UE的第一上行参考信号序列S5和来自第二UE的第二上行参考信号序列S6；处理模块902用于执行S513的步骤。
又例如，收发模块901用于接收来自第一UE的模拟信号A1和来自第二UE的模拟信号A2；处理模块902用于执行S712的步骤。
在第二实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文网络设备的功能，例如图8中的网络设备的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于在处理模块902的控制下，执行S805的步骤。
在第三实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文终端设备的功能，例如图2中的任一UE的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于在处理模块902的控制下执行S202a中向网络设备发送上行信号。
在第四实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文终端设备的功能，例如图5中的任一UE的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于在处理模块902的控制下，执行S509中向网络设备发送第一上行参考信号序列S5。处理模块902例如还用于确定M个位置，M个位置的含义以及具体确定M个位置的方式可参照前文。
在第五实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文终端设备的功能，例如图7中的任一UE的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于在处理模块902的控制下，执行S709中向网络设备发送模拟信号A1。处理模块902例如还用于确定M个位置，M个位置的含义以及具体确定M个位置的方式可参照前文。
在第六实施例中，通信装置900可用于实现前文终端设备的功能，例如图8中的任一UE的功能。
例如，收发模块901用于向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示；处理模块902用于确定M个求和结果。
请参照图10，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。如图10所示，通信装置1000包括处理器1001和通信接口1002。处理器1001和通信接口1002之间相互耦合。可以理解的是，通信接口1002可以为收发器或输入输出接口。其中，处理器1001和通信接口1002可实现前文任一所述的通信方法。
可选的，通信装置1000还可以包括存储器1003，在图10中以虚线框进行示意。存储器1003用于存储处理器1001执行的指令和/或存储处理器1001运行指令所需要的输入数据和/或存储处理器1001运行指令后产生的数据，存储器1003也可以和存储器1003集成在一起。
存储器1003以及通信接口1002之间通过总线连接，总线在图10中以粗线表示，其它部件之间的连接方式，仅是进行示意性说明，并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图10中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
在一个实施例中，该通信装置1000可用于实现前文网络设备的功能，具体也可实现前 文网络设备实现的步骤。
在另一个实施例中，该通信装置1000可以用于实现前文终端设备的功能，具体也可实现前文终端设备实现的步骤。
可选的，处理器1001用于实现上述处理模块902的功能，通信接口1002用于实现上述收发模块901的功能。
可以理解的是，本申请的实施例中的处理器1001可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件，硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器，也可以是任何常规的处理器。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器1003可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically ePROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data eate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器1001为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)可以集成在处理器中。
本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括前文中的网络设备和终端设备，终端设备如前文涉及的UE1和UE2等。相应的，该通信系统也可以实现前文任一的通信方法。网络设备和终端设备的结构均可参照图9所示的通信装置的结构。或者，可参照网络设备和终端设备的结构均可参照图10所示的通信装置的结构。
本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括：处理器和接口。其中，该处理器用于从该接口调用并运行指令，当该处理器执行该指令时，实现上述任一的通信方法。该芯片系统可用于实现前文网络设备的功能。或者，该芯片系统用于实现前文终端设备的功能。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令，当其被运行时，实现上述任一的通信方法。
本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，实现上述任一的通信方法。
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现，也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式 的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于基站或终端中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于基站或终端中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时，全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带；也可以是光介质，例如，数字视频光盘；还可以是半导体介质，例如，固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质，或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。
在本申请的各个实施例中，如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突，不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用，不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。
可以理解的是，在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。

Claims (28)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于网络设备，所述方法包括：
    在第一资源上从多个终端设备接收多个上行信号，每个所述上行信号来自所述多个终端设备中的一个；
    根据所述多个上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于向所述多个终端设备发送数据。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述多个上行信号为参考信号；或者，
    所述多个上行信号为模拟信号，其中，所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应一个第一矩阵，每个所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，每个所述上行信号指示M个元素，所述M个元素为发送所述上行信号的终端设备对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素，所述M个元素处于所述第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，M为正整数。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述多个上行信号中的任意两个上行信号所指示的M个元素在所述第一矩阵中的M个位置相同。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述多个上行信号，确定下行预编码矩阵，包括：
    根据所述多个上行信号，确定M个求和结果，每个所述求和结果为多个元素之和，所述多个元素与所述多个上行信号一一对应，所述多个元素中的每个元素为所对应的上行信号所指示的M个元素中的一个，所述多个元素中的任意两个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的位置相同；
    根据所述M个求和结果和所述M个位置，确定所述下行预编码矩阵。
  5. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自第一终端设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置，所述第一终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
  6. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述多个终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应一个第二矩阵，每个所述第二矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，其中，所述M个位置是根据所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第二矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的。
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据所述多个终端设备中的部分或全部终端设备的信道质量，确定至少一个功率控制参数，所述至少一个功率控制参数对应所述多个终端设备中的至少一个终端设备，所述至少一个功率控制参数中的每个功率控制参数是为所述至少一个终端设备中的一个终端设备的配置的功率控制参数，其中，所述功率控制参数用于确定所述发送所述上行信号的功率。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述至少一个终端设备分别发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示接收所述第一信息的终端设备对应的所述功率控制参数。
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    根据所述下行预编码矩阵，向所述多个终端设备分别发送第一数据，其中，向所述多个终端设备发送所述第一数据所采用的调制与编码策略相同。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自第一终端设备的应答信息，其中，所述应答信息用于指示第二终端设备是否成功接收所述第一数据，或者，用于指示所述多个终端设备是否均成功接收所述第一数据，所述第二终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二终端设备的信道质量小于或等于第一阈值。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述应答信息。
  14. 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定所述多个终端设备中的任意两个终端设备之间的信道相关性大于或等于第二阈值。
  15. 根据权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定待向所述多个终端设备传输的数据对应于同一种应用。
  16. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一终端设备中，所述方法包括：
    向网络设备发送第一上行信号序列，所述第一上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素；
    向所述网络设备发送第二上行信号序列，所述第二上行信号序列在频域上占用多个资源元素，所述第一上行信号序列和所述第二上行信号序列在同一个索引值的资源元素上的相位差不为2nπ，n为整数，并且，所述第一上行信号序列在第一索引值和第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差与所述第二上行信号序列在所述第一索引值和所述第二索引值的资源元素上的相位差之间的差值为2mπ，m为整数。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述网络设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述第一终端设备的功率控制参数，所述功率控制参数用于确定所述第一终端设备发送所述第一上行信号序列和/或所述第二上行信号序列的功率。
  18. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一终端设备中，所述方法包括：
    确定所述第一终端设备对应的第一矩阵的M个元素，其中，所述M个元素处于所述第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；
    在第一资源上向网络设备发送第一上行信号，其中，所述第一上行信号为模拟信号，且所述第一上行信号用于指示所述M个元素。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述网络设备或其他终端设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置，所述其他终端设备是指多个终端设备中除了所述第一终端设备之外的终端设备。
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，其中，所述其他终端设备为多个终端设备除了所述第一终端设备之外的终端设备，所述多个终端设备中的每个所述终端设备对应一个所述第一矩阵；
    根据所述多个终端设备所对应的多个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置，确定所述M个位置；
    向所述其他终端设备和/或所述网络设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述M个位置。
  21. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一终端设备中，所述方法包括：
    确定M个求和结果，其中，每个所述求和结果为多个元素之和，所述多个元素与多个第一矩阵一一对应，所述多个元素中的每个元素为所对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素中的一个，所述M个元素处于所对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置上，所述M个位置均不同，所述多个元素中的任意两个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的位置相同，所述多个第一矩阵中的每个第一矩阵与多个终端设备中的一个终端设备对应，每个所述第一矩阵包括至少一个零元素和/或至少一个非零元素，每个所述非零元素为一个合并系数，所述合并系数为空域向量与频域向量的合并系数，M为正整数；
    向网络设备发送预编码矩阵指示，所述预编码矩阵指示是根据所述M个求和结果确定的，所述预编码矩阵指示用于指示下行预编码矩阵，所述下行预编码矩阵用于发送数据。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示发送所述第二信息的终端设备所对应的第一矩阵的非零元素和所述非零元素的位置，所述其他终端设备为所述多个终端设备中除了第一终端设备之外的终端设备，其中，所述M个位置是根据所述多个第一矩阵中的非零元素的位置确定的；或，
    接收来自其他终端设备中的每个终端设备的第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示发送所述第三信息的终端设备所对应的第一矩阵中的M个元素，所述其他终端设备为所述多个终端设备中除了第一终端设备之外的终端设备，其中，所述多个终端设备中的任意两个终端设备所对应的M个元素在各自所对应的第一矩阵中的M个位置相同。
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    接收来自网络设备的第一数据；
    向所述网络设备发送应答信息，所述应答信息用于指示第二终端设备是否成功接收所述第一数据，或者，用于指示所述多个终端设备是否均成功接收所述第一数据，所述第二终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的一个。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二终端设备的信道质量小于或等于第一阈值。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述应答信息。
  26. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行如权利要求1至25中的任一项所述方法的模块。
  27. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置，所述处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。
  28. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令被通信装置执行时，实现如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/097383 2022-06-29 2023-05-31 一种通信方法及装置 Ceased WO2024001655A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP23829840.0A EP4535681A4 (en) 2022-06-29 2023-05-31 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210761826.4 2022-06-29
CN202210761826.4A CN117353779A (zh) 2022-06-29 2022-06-29 一种通信方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US19/003,150 Continuation US20260121701A1 (en) 2022-06-29 2024-12-27 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024001655A1 true WO2024001655A1 (zh) 2024-01-04

Family

ID=89358153

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/097383 Ceased WO2024001655A1 (zh) 2022-06-29 2023-05-31 一种通信方法及装置

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4535681A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN117353779A (zh)
WO (1) WO2024001655A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN118890068A (zh) * 2024-08-01 2024-11-01 东南大学 大规模mimo高铁通信信道预测及传输方法

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20250309963A1 (en) * 2024-03-26 2025-10-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Precoding for joint transmission in distributed mimo with explicit and implicit signaling

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101257367A (zh) * 2007-02-28 2008-09-03 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 选择预编码的方法和装置
CN101626264A (zh) * 2008-07-09 2010-01-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种无线通信系统中实现开环预编码的方法
US20150236773A1 (en) * 2012-09-05 2015-08-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Efficient feedback transmission method in multi-antenna wireless communication system and device for same
CN107248878A (zh) * 2016-03-29 2017-10-13 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 一种预编码的方法及装置
US20180091207A1 (en) * 2015-04-08 2018-03-29 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Base station, user equipment, and method for determining precoding matrix
CN110875766A (zh) * 2018-08-29 2020-03-10 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 信道状态信息反馈方法、预编码矩阵确定方法及装置
WO2022021443A1 (zh) * 2020-07-31 2022-02-03 华为技术有限公司 一种预编码方法及装置

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4224905A4 (en) * 2020-10-31 2023-11-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. CHANNEL INFORMATION REPORTING METHOD AND APPARATUS

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101257367A (zh) * 2007-02-28 2008-09-03 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 选择预编码的方法和装置
CN101626264A (zh) * 2008-07-09 2010-01-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种无线通信系统中实现开环预编码的方法
US20150236773A1 (en) * 2012-09-05 2015-08-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Efficient feedback transmission method in multi-antenna wireless communication system and device for same
US20180091207A1 (en) * 2015-04-08 2018-03-29 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Base station, user equipment, and method for determining precoding matrix
CN107248878A (zh) * 2016-03-29 2017-10-13 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 一种预编码的方法及装置
CN110875766A (zh) * 2018-08-29 2020-03-10 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 信道状态信息反馈方法、预编码矩阵确定方法及装置
WO2022021443A1 (zh) * 2020-07-31 2022-02-03 华为技术有限公司 一种预编码方法及装置

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4535681A4 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN118890068A (zh) * 2024-08-01 2024-11-01 东南大学 大规模mimo高铁通信信道预测及传输方法

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4535681A1 (en) 2025-04-09
EP4535681A4 (en) 2025-12-03
CN117353779A (zh) 2024-01-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN112751592B (zh) 上报信道状态信息的方法和通信装置
CN111865372B (zh) 一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法和通信装置
WO2020221118A1 (zh) 指示和确定预编码矩阵的方法以及通信装置
US11082275B2 (en) Electrical apparatus and wireless communication method for communication device with multiple antennas
WO2020199964A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN111756422B (zh) 指示信道状态信息的方法以及通信装置
WO2024001655A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN112054824A (zh) 一种信道测量方法和通信装置
WO2024093830A1 (zh) 一种信道状态参数的上报方法、装置及系统
WO2024067251A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及相关设备
WO2023155782A1 (zh) 上行预编码矩阵确定方法及通信装置
CN105846870B (zh) 用于多输入多输出无线通信系统的装置和方法
WO2025148743A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置、系统
WO2017185982A1 (zh) 准共位置类型的处理方法、装置及计算机存储介质
CN121569452A (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
TWI834162B (zh) 信號傳輸方法、裝置、終端及基地台
US20260121701A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN121690293A (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2025139591A1 (zh) 预编码参数传输方法、装置及系统
CN120282201A (zh) 信道状态信息上报方法及通信装置
CN121508764A (zh) 信道状态信息上报方法及通信装置
WO2025218573A1 (zh) 信道状态信息上报方法及通信装置
CN121603180A (zh) 信道状态信息上报方法及通信装置
WO2024027393A1 (zh) 信道状态信息反馈方法及装置
WO2026051549A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23829840

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023829840

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2023829840

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20250102

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2023829840

Country of ref document: EP